Introduction

In this section, you can find the basic information about the product and also the formatting conventions used in the topics.

In this Section
  • General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)
  • Liabilities and Warnings
  • About the User Guide
  • System Overview
  • The User Interface

General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)

This product offers the possibility to process personal identifiable information such as system user name, role and IP-address. The purpose of this processing capability could be to enhance quality control through traceability and proper access management.

If you decide to process personal data you need to be aware of and comply with relevant personal data protection rules, including, in the EU the GDPR as well as other applicable laws, directives and regulations. Atlas Copco can in no way be held liable for any use made by you of the product.

Liabilities and Warnings

  • Liability
  • Warnings

Liability

Many events in the operating environment may affect the tightening process and shall require a validation of results. In compliance with applicable standards and/or regulations, we hereby require you to check the installed torque and rotational direction after any event that can influence the tightening result. Examples of such events include but are not limited to:

  • initial installation of the tooling system

  • change of part batch, bolt, screw batch, tool, software, configuration or environment

  • change of air- or electrical connections

  • change in line ergonomics, process, quality procedures or practices

  • changing of operator

  • any other change that influences the result of the tightening process

The check should:

  • Ensure that the joint conditions have not changed due to events of influence.

  • Be done after initial installation, maintenance or repair of the equipment.

  • Occur at least once per shift or at another suitable frequency.

Warnings

NOTICE

Changing parameters may lead to a decrease in tool performance and may also slow down the production.

WARNING

Risk of Property Damage or Severe Injury

Ensure that you read, understand and follow all instructions before operating the tool. Failure to follow all the instructions may result in electric shock, fire, property damage and/or severe bodily injury.

  • Read all Safety Information delivered together with the different parts of the system.

  • Read all Product Instructions for installation, operation and maintenance of the different parts of the system.

  • Read all locally legislated safety regulations regarding the system and parts thereof.

  • Save all Safety Information and instructions for future reference.

About the User Guide

This user guide describes how to set up and configure an IxB tool using the IxB Software.

In this Section
  • Revision History
  • Target Group
  • Conventions

Revision History

Document Revision

IxB Software Version

Changes

1.0

3.3

First edition

2.0

3.4

Open end tuning function added: Open End Tuning

Tightening program selection function added: General Settings

Software update troubleshooting section added: Software Update Troubleshooting

Maximum number of steps in a tightening program updated: Adding a Tightening Program

Trace Settings function added: Step Parameters

3.0

3.5

Function for configuration of WLAN channels added: Configuring Channels

Function for Statistical Process Control (SPC) added: SPC - Statistical Process Control

Function for configuration of result presentation added: Configuring Result Presentation Settings

Function for configuration of user permissions added: Configuring the PIN Settings

Function for viewing server connection status added: Viewing Protocol Status

Function for synchronizing traces added: Viewing Synchronized Traces

Function for clearing results added: Performing Factory Reset and Clearing Results

Target Group

This user guide is intended for anyone configuring or operating an IxB tool using the IxB Software.

In this Section
  • Prerequisites

Prerequisites

Anyone interested in learning more about the IxB Software can benefit from reading this user guide.

For a complete understanding of the technical aspects in the user guide the following is recommended:

  • Knowledge about tightening techniques

  • Experience of working with Power Focus 6000

For more information about Power Focus 6000, refer to the Power Focus 6000 User Guide.

Conventions

To enhance user understanding, certain formatting conventions are used throughout this document. The formatting conventions used are listed below.

User Guide Conventions

Element

Notation

Description

Output

General emphasis

In the Program workspace.

To make certain text elements stand out, or to highlight.

Text in Bold

Graphical User Interface (GUI) items

Select the Function button.

Any reference to items found on screen in the GUI (for example, command buttons, icon names and field names).

Text in Bold

Graphical User Interface (GUI) Path >

Generally, on the top of the GUI.

Navigation aid which keeps track of the location in the GUI.

For example: Controller > Program > Edit

User input

Enter a Description for the program.

Any text input by the user.

Text in Bold

File names

Enter a File Name for the export.

Files either exported from, or imported into the system.

Text in Bold Italic

Variable and parameter names

Enter a Name for the export.

Variable and parameter names (not values).

Text in Italic

Variable and parameter values

Enter a VALUE for the export.

Variable and parameter values.

Text in BOLD CAPS

System output

Client.Domain.Models.ExportImportConfiguration

Any text output by the system.

Text in Monospace

External links

https://servaid.atlascopco.com

www.atlascopco.com

http://webbox.atlascopco.com/webbox/dimdrw

Links to external sites that have information connected to the document or subject content. These could include:

  • Technical Product Data

  • Dimensional Drawings

  • Accessories

  • Product Specific Information

Selectable text to external sites

Internal documentation links

  • Relevant Information - links to information which is directly related to the current topic and needs to be considered for certain configurations that are made.

  • In this Section - links to all the topics within the section, which can be useful when understanding a feature, or configuration.

If available, these links will be presented below the text.

Selectable text to internal content

System Overview

A manufacturing system may consist of the functional blocks in the figure:

A

Factory network.

H

Controller factory port: connected to the factory network.

B

ACDC: for storing tightening results and for statistical analysis.

I

Power Focus 6000 controller: used with handheld tools.

C

ToolsTalk 2 server: for configuration and parameter settings for controllers and IxB tools.

J

Handheld battery tool: uses a wireless connection to the controller.

D

Industrial PC (IPC): can be used as client terminal to the ToolsTalk 2 and ToolsNet servers.

K

PF6 Flex controller: used with fixtured tools.

E

Portable computer connected to the factory network: can be used as client terminal to the ToolsTalk 2 and ToolsNet servers.

L

IxB handheld battery tool: uses a wireless connection to the factory network.

F

Service computer: can be connected to the service port of a controller or an IxB tool.

M

The internet cloud.

G

Controller service port: can be used to connect a service computer.

N

Atlas Copco Licensing Portal (ACLP): located at Atlas Copco and provides support to licensed functionality in the Functional Management System (FMS).

The User Interface

  • Home Menu
  • Icons

Home Menu

The home menu contains the following items:

Menu Item

Description

Tightening

The Tightening menu shows a list of existing tightening programs stored in the tool. Selecting an individual program opens the different menus to configure and set parameters for the selected tightening program.

Batch Sequence

A batch sequence is one or more repetitive tightening programs in various combinations. Batch sequences are created and configured in the Batch sequence menu.

Sources

The Sources menu lists available options for controlling the selection of a tightening program, or a batch sequence, via digital input from different hardware.

Configurations

In this menu the following can be configured:

  • Tool Configuration

  • Socket Selector

  • I/O Expander and I/O Hub

  • General Virtual Station

Integrated Controller Tool

This menu includes items such as:

  • Virtual Station

    • Assign accessories and select accessory configurations.

    • Assign a task to the virtual station either manually or configure how external signals are used to assign the task.

    • Enable communication protocols to factory management systems.

  • Tool

    • Tool model

    • Tool and battery health

    • Service and calibration intervals

    • QA calibration

    • Motor tuning

This menu also includes functions for software update and export/import of configuration parameters.

Reports

Displays the latest tightening results, events and NOK ratio.

Settings

This menu is used to set up specific settings such as:

  • Wireless client

  • Server connections

  • Time and date, language preference, PIN

  • Tool alarm settings

  • Event code configurations

License Assignment

This menu gives an overview of the current license status and license sources.

Help

The Help menu contains the IxB Software user guide.

Icons

The following table gives an overview of the icons and buttons available in the user interface:

Icon

Name

Description

Back

Return to previous view.

Home

Go to the Home screen.

Go to Results

Go to the live results screen.

Padlock

Opens a dialog box for PIN code.

Events

Displays the latest tightening events. Define what events to display in the event configurations in the Settings menu.

Validate

Validates tightening parameters against tool values.

Add

Adds an item.

Delete

Deletes an item.

Protocol Status

Displays the Status Protocol pop-up window, which shows open protocol information and server connection status.

Notice

Sign showing that a parameter is configured incorrectly.

Installation and Upgrade

In this section, you can find information to help with the initial installation of the product, or upgrading from one version to another.

In this Section
  • Installation Restrictions
  • Licenses
  • Upgrading

Installation Restrictions

  • Web Browser Requirements

Web Browser Requirements

The following web browsers are recommended for the IxB Software user interface:

  • Firefox

  • Google Chrome

  • Microsoft Edge

Licenses

Feature licenses are managed through the Functionality Management System (FMS). This allows customers to tailor tool functions to their specific needs through a dynamic licensing scheme.

Licenses can be obtained for individual features or collections of features and can be deployed across multiple virtual stations. The licenses can be returned to the pool when they are no longer required.

Licenses can be downloaded from the Atlas Copco License Portal (ACLP) and managed/distributed through ToolsTalk, or can be stored on a FMS Portable (USB drive) to be inserted into the tool.

Note that the creation and management of a customer account in the ACLP is not covered in this documentation. Contact the local Atlas Copco representative for more information.

There are three types of licenses:

  • Virtual Station Type

    A fixed collection of features bundled together in a single package. The Virtual Station Type license determines, among other things, how many programs and sequences can be used, which tightening strategies are available, and the type of reporting that can be done. The features contained in each Virtual Station Type are features that often are used in conjunction with each other, or which have internal dependencies that require the presence of other features in the package. Virtual Station Types licenses are assigned in their entirety to a virtual station. The virtual station can then make use of all features contained in the Virtual Station Type. In order to be able to perform tightenings, a Virtual Station has to be assigned a Virtual Station Type license. Depending on the license type, various tightening options will be enabled or blocked.

  • Virtual Station Feature

    Individual features can be purchased as a single licenses to complement the virtual station type licenses.

  • Controller Feature

    In order to perform a tightening the Integrated Controller License must be stored on the tool.

License Sources

Licenses used on a tool can be pulled from several different sources. The number of simultaneous sources is limited to 10 (either 10 FMS Portable sources, or one License Server (TT2) in addition to nine FMS Portable sources). If a license is to be added from a source when the source limit (10) has been reached, all licenses from one source need to be removed from the tool to make room for licenses from the other source.

The Source Overview tab (License assignment > Source Overview) provides an overview of the licenses installed on the tool, as well as where they were installed from. A maximum number of 10 different sources can be displayed here, and each will be designated with FMS P (for FMS Portable, or dongle), or License Server (TT2).

Selecting any license source will present that source's detailed license source information. It lists the source name and type, as well as the number and type of licenses in each category (Virtual Station Type, Virtual Station Feature and Controller Feature).

Configuration of features governed by licenses can be done even in the absence of an installed license, for example, configuration of tightening programs. Assigning these features to a tool or virtual station is also possible. However, running the feature without a valid license will require the installation of the appropriate license.

License enforcement is performed at two stages: assignment and runtime (trigger pressed). If a feature for which no license is installed is assigned to a virtual station, a red exclamation mark will appear in the tool or task section of the user interface (depending on what is missing). If a feature, for which no license is installed, is started, an event will be presented informing which license is missing. It will not be possible to proceed without a correct license installed. Running an unlicensed feature will, in most cases, result in a locked tool.

In this Section
  • Installing Licenses on the Tool
  • Removing Licenses from the Tool

Installing Licenses on the Tool

Note that license sources are limited to one (1) License Server (TT2) and nine FMS Portables (USB dongles) simultaneously. Licenses are either installed via the server (ToolsTalk2) or via FMS Portable. If the license source limit is reached, all licenses from one source need to be removed from the tool in order to add licenses from another source.

Existing licenses are checked against the license server every two hours. If no response from the license server is obtained within a period of 14 days, the affected licenses will be revoked. The user will also be warned when licenses are about to expire. When a license is within 7 days of expiration, the user will be presented with a warning once every two hours. If licenses are not renewed, they will expire and the affected functions will no longer be available.

Installing Licenses from the Server

Server based licenses are distributed through ToolsTalk2. For instructions on how to install server licenses, refer to ToolsTalk2 User Guide.

To enable license installation using ToolsTalk2, the correct license server settings must be configured in the tool.

Configure the tool for server license installation
  1. Go to Settings in the home menu ans select Server connections in the left pane.

  2. In the Atlas Copco License Manager field, set the switch to On.

  3. Insert the correct Server port and Server host IP address (usually the same as the IP address for ToolsTalk2).

  4. Select Apply.

Installing Licenses from FMS Portable (USB Dongle)

The Functionality Management System (FMS) uses a special FMS Portable device to transfer functionality to and from a tool. The USB flash drive contains both a general purpose memory area and a trusted storage area that is only accessible by the License Manager in a tool. The purchased feature items are downloaded from Atlas Copco to the general purpose area. The first time the FMS Portable is inserted into a tool with a License Manager, the file is detected and decoded and the feature items are transferred to the trusted storage area that is only accessible from a License Manager.

Install licenses using a USB dongle
  1. Connect the USB dongle to the tool via a USB adapter cable.

    Prior to the license installation, make sure that the tool has a wireless connection set up to the factory network.

    The USB License Management window will appear. The Pool column will show the total license count on the tool from all sources. The Available on FMS P column shows the licenses available on this dongle, while the From this FMS P column shows the number of licenses that have been moved to this tool from this particular FMS P.

  2. Select the left-pointing arrow next to the license you want to install on the tool.

    The number in the Available on FMS P column will decrease by 1 and the number in the From this FMS P column will increase by 1.

Removing Licenses from the Tool

Removing Licenses Installed on the Server

For instructions on removing server-installed licenses, refer to the ToolsTalk2 User Guide.

Removing FMS Portable-installed Licenses

  1. Connect the USB dongle to the tool via a USB adapter cable.

    Prior to the license removal, make sure that the tool has a wireless connection set up to the factory network.

  2. If the USB License Manager window is not visible, go to License Assignment in the home menu.

  3. Select the USB icon in the top right of the window. The USB License Manager dialog box appears.

  4. Select the right-pointing arrow next to the license that is to be removed from the tool.

    Licenses that are assigned to the virtual station can be removed from the tool. However, as a result the virtual station cannot be used.

Upgrading

  • Software Versions
    • Software Activation
    • Update Software Version
  • Software Update Troubleshooting
  • Rescue Mode

Software Versions

Two software versions can be installed in the tool simultaneously. Installing a second version of the software is useful when performing upgrades on multiple tools. When production is ready for switching to the upgraded software, activation of the new software version is done from the IxB Software user interface, or with ToolsTalk 2.

Changing software versions does not transfer the tool configurations or tightening programs.

In this Section
  • Software Activation
  • Update Software Version

Software Activation

The tool can store two installed software versions. By using the Software activation, it is possible to choose which software version to use.

Make sure to keep the battery connected to the tool throughout the procedure.

Activate a software version
  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Software in the left pane.

  2. Select Current or Stored in the Software Activation window.

The tool is automatically restarted for the activation to take effect.

Update Software Version

Make sure to keep the battery connected to the tool throughout the procedure.

  1. Go to the Integrated Controller Tool menu and select Software in the left pane.

  2. Go to the Software Update field and select BROWSE.

  3. Browse and choose the zip file with the applicable software and follow the instructions to finish installation.

Software Update Troubleshooting

An error during the software update will be indicated by the LED ring as follows:

Tightening direction LEDs are flashing eight times, followed by steady light for half a second. This flash pattern will be repeated until the tool automatically performs a restart. To view the error message, connect the tool to the IxB Software web user interface. As the IxB Software is loading, the error message will be displayed.

Possible error messages with corresponding resolve actions are listed below:

Error message

Resolve action

Board hardware information not valid

Contact Market Support

Device hardware information not valid

Contact Market Support

File contents corrupt

Replace IAM (SD card)

File incompatible with hardware

Replace IAM (SD card)

File not found

Replace IAM (SD card)

File read error

Replace IAM (SD card)

Target communication timeout

Replace part defined as target

Target reception error

Replace part defined as target

Target unexpected reply

Replace part defined as target

Target unreachable

Replace part defined as target

Target transmission error

Replace part defined as target

The target, that is the sub system where the error occurred, can be one of the following:

Target

Description

BHMI

LED ring

FTS

Front Transducer

MCB

Motor Control Board

MRT

Main board Real Time

Rescue Mode

After three unsuccessful restarts the tool will enter Rescue Mode. In this mode it is possible to update the software and/or perform disk management.

Update software in Rescue Mode
  1. Connect the tool to the USB port of the PC. Open a web browser and type in the address 169.254.1.1.

  2. In the Rescue Mode user interface, go to the Software Update tab.

  3. Select the file system to be updated and browse for the correct file.

  4. Select the Update button.

  5. Go to the Power tab and reboot the system.

Perform disk management in Rescue Mode
  1. Connect the tool to the USB port of the PC. Open a web browser and type in the address 169.254.1.1.

  2. In the Rescue Mode user interface, go to the Disk Management tab.

  3. Choose to repair file system or clean data, as appropriate.

  4. Select the Submit button.

  5. Go to the Power tab and reboot the system.

Configuration

In this section, you can find detailed information about how to create, modify, and verify product settings.

In this Section
  • Configuration Options
  • Getting Started
  • Working with the Tightening Tab
  • Working with the Batch Sequence Tab
  • Working with the Sources Tab
  • Working with the Configurations Tab
  • Working with the Integrated Controller Tool Tab
  • Working with the Settings Tab

Configuration Options

The configuration and setting up of the tool can be done in the following ways:

  • IxB Software:The tool can be directly connected to a PC via a USB cable. If the tool is connected to a wireless network and its IP address is known, it can be accessed from a computer anywhere on the network.

  • ToolsTalk 2: If the tool is connected to a ToolsTalk 2 server, a ToolsTalk 2 client (PC) can access all connected tools and controllers through ToolsTalk 2. IxB tools, as well as Power Focus 6000 controllers and Flex controllers can be accessed.

  • ToolsTalk 2 in Station Setup mode: Provides a ToolsTalk 2 interface on a PC without a server installation. The PC is connected to the controller service port and provides access to one controller at a time.

  • Controller: This is applicable to Power Focus 6000 controllers which have a touchscreen. A controller can be configured regardless whether it is connected to the network or not.

This user guide covers the IxB Software. For information about ToolsTalk 2 and Power Focus 6000, refer to ToolsTalk 2 User Guide and Power Focus 6000 User Guide.

Getting Started

To create a better overview of the system, this section provides a quick guide covering the basic steps required to get started with the Tensor IxB tool and IxB Software. The section does not explain every feature of the system, but instead focuses on the most basic ones.

Get started
  1. Connect the tool to a PC and access the user interface. Set up a wireless connection between the tool and the network.

  2. Define a tightening program containing all relevant parameters of a tightening, for example target angle and target torque.

    If applicable, create a batch sequence. One or several tightening programs can be added to a batch sequence which works as a series of tightening programs. A batch sequence can for example be a certain number of tightenings with a tightening program, or a sequence of different tightening programs.

  3. Assign a task to the virtual station of the tool. The task can be either a tightening program, a batch sequence, or a specified digital input (from for example a barcode scanner).

In this Section
  • Accessing the IxB Software User Interface
  • Creating a Tightening Program
  • Assigning a Task to the Virtual Station

Accessing the IxB Software User Interface

  1. Remove the cover of the tool's USB connection port.

  2. Connect the tool to the USB-port of the PC.

  3. Open a web browser and type in the address of the IxB Software user interface: 169.254.1.1.

  4. To access the user interface wirelessly, refer to the instructions in the section Configure a Wireless Client.

Relevant Information
  • Configuring a Wireless Client

Creating a Tightening Program

  1. Go to Tightening in the home menu.

  2. Select the plus icon.

  3. In the Choose Operation Mode window, select Tightening.

  4. Open the Properties window and type in a valid Maximum Torque Limit for the specific tool. Type Enter. Close the Properties window.

  5. Open the Steps pane on the right and drag and drop the steps to create a tightening program.

  6. Set Monitors and Restrictions for each step as applicable and press the Enter key.

The tightening program must have a loosening program configured.

Create a loosening program
  1. Go to Tightening in the home menu.

  2. Select the plus icon.

  3. In the Choose Operation Mode window, select Loosening.

  4. Open the Properties window and type in a valid Maximum Torque Limit for the specific tool. Type Enter. Close the Properties window.

  5. Open the Steps pane on the right and drag and drop the steps to create a loosening program.

  6. Set Monitors and Restrictions for each step as applicable and type Enter.

Add the loosening program to the tightening program
  1. Go to Tightening in the home menu and select a tightening program from the list.

  2. Expand Properties by selecting the arrow.

  3. Under General settings, select Loosening Program and choose a loosening program in the list. Type Enter.

Relevant Information
  • Configuring a Tightening Program

Assigning a Task to the Virtual Station

  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu.

  2. Under Virtual Station > Task select Choose task.

  3. Choose a Tightening program from the list.

Relevant Information
  • Assigning a Task to a Virtual Station

Working with the Tightening Tab

This section describes the multistep tightening strategy and how to create a tightening program.

Some features require licenses distributed through the Functionality Management System (FMS). Whereas configuration of features is possible without specific licenses, the assignment and use of those features will require the correct license to be installed on the tool.

WARNING

Risk of injury

A change in configuration to the tightening program may cause unexpected torque, rotational direction, or speed in the system(s) where the tightening program is currently in use. This could result in severe bodily injury and/or property damage.

  • Check the tightening program configurations after adding a new program or after applying changes to an existing program.

Relevant Information
  • Licenses
In this Section
  • Multistep Tightening Strategy
  • Configuring a Tightening Program

Multistep Tightening Strategy

A multistep tightening is a tightening done in several steps. The number of steps and the type of the steps vary depending on the tightening to be done. A multistep tightening program is highly configurable, including monitoring functions and restrictions. A total of 16 steps can be added to a multistep program.

Restrictions are used to make sure the tightening stops if something unexpected occurs. These restrictions could, for example, test that a maximum set torque is not reached or that a part of the multistep tightening does not take too long to run. Every step can have up to four restrictions each. Each step has mandatory step restrictions and optional step restrictions. The mandatory restrictions are included when dragging a new step to the multistep program.

Monitors are used to verify that the tightening was made according to the specification. This can be, for example, angle limits or torque limits. Every step can have up to eight monitors each. Each step has mandatory step monitors and optional step monitors. The mandatory monitors are included when dragging a new step to the multistep program.

In this Section
  • Multistep Configuration User Interface
  • Step Parameters
  • Overview of Available Steps
  • Overview of Available Step Monitors
  • Overview of Available Step Restrictions
  • Tightening Program Properties

Multistep Configuration User Interface

The user interface for configuring a multistep program can be divided into three main areas:

  • In the top there is a drop-down menu containing the Properties of the multistep tightening program. Here general properties such as program name, overall program monitor and validation can be set.

  • To the right there are three tabs containing the Steps, Monitors and Restrictions that can be used to build the multistep program. To use any of the items, select the appropriate tab, and drag the item in the list to the tightening area. Depending on its function, either drop the item between the beginning and the end of the program (for steps), or on top of a particular step (for monitors and restrictions).

  • The main area of the user interface is made up of the tightening area. This is the area that includes all the steps in the tightening program.

Step Parameters

The following step parameters are common for many of the step types. The parameters are set in the step properties window which is displayed when selecting a step in the tightening program.

Parameter

Description

Name

Name of the step.

Rotational direction

Each of the tightening steps can run either forward, that is to make a tightening, or reverse, to loosen the screw slightly. The arrows indicate this direction. Many of the tightening steps have a direction hard-coded to forward, for example Tighten to Angle, or Tighten to Torque. Steps such as Loosen to Angle or Loosen to Torque have their direction automatically set to reverse.

The reverse setting is not allowed for tools configured with Gear Front Attachment (GFA) of type open end. The tightening direction of the tightening program must be the same as the tightening direction of the open end tool for a tightening to be allowed to be run. It is possible to assign a loosening program to a tightening program for an open end tool, but if the direction switch is set to run the loosening program, the tool will be locked.

Step category

For each step, there is an option to choose a step category. By selecting step category, the NOK tightenings will be listed in the event result view with related detailed status together with the corresponding multistep error information. If no selection is made, the detailed status will be set to "uncategorized multistep error". The related detailed status can be customized.

Angle window

A joint is considered Hard if the screw is tightened to its full torque and it rotates 30 degrees (or less) after it has been tightened to its snug point. A Soft joint rotates 720 degrees or more after it has been tightened to its snug point. The hardness parameter defines the Angle Window for the gradient calculation. The harder the joint - the smaller the angle window.

Speed Ramp / Acceleration (only available in ToolsTalk 2)

For most of the steps it is possible to specify how the acceleration to the target speed should be achieved. Three different settings are possible; Hard, Soft and Manual. The acceleration defined will be used whenever a step is started. Regardless whether the tool is already running with speed at the beginning of the step, the ramp will be used to accelerate to the target speed of the step. This will be the case even if the speed at the start of the step is higher, or lower than the target speed.

Speed ramp - Hard and Soft mode

  • Hard: 2000 rpm/s (Speed Ramp between 1000 and 10000 rpm/s is a Hard acceleration.)

  • Soft: 500 rpm/s (Speed Ramp between 200 and 1000 rpm/s is a Soft acceleration.)

Speed ramp - Manual mode

  • Speed:

    • Default value: 60 rpm

    • Minimum limit: > 0

    • Maximum limit: ≤ Tool Max Speed

  • Acceleration:

    • Default value: 500 rpm/s

    • Minimum limit: > 0

    • Maximum limit: ≤ Tool Max Acceleration

Using speed shifts

1−5 angle triggers or torque triggers can be defined during a step, where the speed will shift.

Within one step, all the speed shift triggers are based on the same property, that is either torque or angle. They cannot be mixed within one step.

The Torque triggers and Angle triggers must be less than the step target, depending on the type of the step and the trigger type.

The Torque trigger and Torque speed also validate against the Max torque and Max speed of the tool. A warning or error indicator occurs whenever the Speed Shift settings exceed either the tool max values, or step max values.

The Torque triggers and Angle triggers must be less than the step target, depending on the type of the step and the trigger type.

The Torque trigger and Torque speed also validate against the Max torque and Max speed of the tool. A warning or error indicator occurs whenever the Speed Shift settings exceed either the tool max values, or step max values.

It is possible to push the settings to the tool when a tightening program has a warning, but not when a tightening program has an error (fault) indicator.

Brake type

The braking behavior of a multistep tightening program can be controlled at two possible locations in the program: in a step preceding a reversal of direction of the tightening, and/or at the final step of the tightening program. At other locations in the tightening program, the braking parameters will not be available in the step's general settings. Braking can be set to either Ergo stop or Inertia. Inertia will brake the tool completely, while Ergo stop will allow for a more ergonomic slowing down of the tightening.

Inertia has no additional parameters.

Ergo stop parameters:

  • Adaptive brake: Set the Adaptive Brake to On or Off

  • Ramp time: Only available when Adaptive Brake is set to Off. Insert time in ms.

Trace Setting

When the trace configuration is enabled on the program level, the trace resolution can be configured on step level. The setting for Trace Setting defines how the sampling should be done on each specific step.

Parameter

Description

Trace Setting

  • Program: Use the settings as defined on program level.

  • Manual: The trace sample type from the program level will be used, that is, Time or Angle. Using a different sample rate will override the setting on the program level.

Sample Time

Choose the sample time from the drop-down list (0.25 - 1000 ms)

Sample Angle

Choose the sample angle from the drop-down list (0.25 - 20 degree)

With this trace recording the sample rates will not be the same in all the steps, instead the sample rate depends on the configuration in each step. This means the trace is divided into one trace for each step.

The maximum number of samples in a trace is 4096.

If a tightening produce more than 4096 values a down-sampling will take place. This is done by removing every second trace sample from the whole tightening and when continue the recording with half the resolution. This process will be repeated every time the 4096 sample limit is reached.

If more than 2048 in total was recorded, this process will result in a trace between 2048 and 4096 samples.

If the limit if 4096 samples is reached the configured trace sample times will no longer be followed. Instead the sample times will be doubled or quadrupled etc., depending on how many times the down sampling has taken place. Since all steps are down sampled the relation between the steps will still be the same though. If a step was configured with double sample time compared to another step, this will still be the case in the final trace regardless how many times a down-sampling has occurred.

If more than 4096 samples is recorded, the configured trace sample times will no longer be followed. Instead the sample times will be doubled or quadrupled, etc., depending on how many times the down sampling has taken place. Since all steps are down sampled the relation between the steps will still be the same though. If a step was configured with double sample time compared to another step, this will still be the case in the final trace regardless how many times a down-sampling has occurred.

Trace channel

Note

Torque

Available for all tools equipped with a torque transducer

Angle

Available for all tools

Torque Second

Only available for tools with two torque transducers

Angle Second

Only available for tools with two angle transducers

Current

Available for all tools

Gradient

Available if some step/restriction/monitor produces the gradient values

Overview of Available Steps

The steps described in this section are available for creation of multistep tightening programs.

The following tightening steps are not supported for tools configured with Gear Front Attachment (GFA) of type open end:

  • Loosen to Angle

  • Loosen to Trigger Release

  • Loosen to Torque

  • Engage

  • Socket Release

  • Tighten to DynaTork

W – Wait

In this step the tool waits the specified amount of time. The tool does not rotate while waiting.

The tool waits the specified time. If the hold position is set to On the tool holds the position during the Wait time.

SR - Socket Release

This step runs the tool with speed n in the backward direction until the target angle is reached. The target angle is measured from the start of the step.

This step is only allowed to use as the last step in the tightening path of a multistep tightening program. However, it is possible to add a sync point after this step.

Parameter

Description

Target angle

The angle target.

Default: 3º , must be > 0

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp

If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm.

A – Tighten to Angle / Loosen to Angle

A – Tighten to Angle

This step runs the tool until the target angle is reached. The target angle is measured from the start of the step.

A – Loosen to Angle

This step runs the tool with the speed n in the backward direction until the angle target is reached. The target angle is measured from the start of the step.

Parameters

Parameter

Description

Target angle

The angle target. Must be > 0.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp

If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Brake

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

TrR – Loosen to Trigger Release

This step runs in the backward direction until the tool trigger is released (loosen). It can only be used as a last step in a program.

Parameter

Description

Speed

Numerical value for rotation speed; in rpm.

Speed Ramp Type

List of options where speed ramp can be chosen [Hard, Soft, Manual]

TTTR – Tighten to Trigger Release

This step runs until the tool trigger is released (tighten). It can only be used as a last step in a tightening program.

Parameter

Description

Speed

Numerical value for rotation speed; in rpm.

Speed Ramp Type

List of options where speed ramp can be chosen [Hard, Soft, Manual]

T - Tighten to Torque / Loosen to Torque

T – Tighten to Torque

This step runs the tool with the programmed speed in forward direction until the target torque is reached.

Parameter

Description

Target torque

The torque target. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp

If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Brake

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

T – Loosen to Torque

This step runs the tool with the speed in the backward direction. For the step to be active, the torque must first exceed 110 % of the Target torque. The Target torque should be set to a positive value. After reaching the target torque, the step runs until the torque drops below the target torque.

Parameter

Description

Target torque

The torque target. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp

If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Brake

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

T+A – Tighten to Torque Plus Angle

This step runs the tool until the target torque is reached. From this point it continues to run an additional target angle.

Parameter

Description

Target torque

The torque target. Must be > 0.

Target angle

The angle target. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp

If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm.

Brake

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

T|A – Tighten to Torque or Angle

This step runs the tool with the speed n in the forward direction until the first of either torque target or angle target is reached. The torque and angle measurements start at the beginning of the step.

Parameter

Description

Target torque

Must be > 0.

Target angle

Must be > 0.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp

If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Brake

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

T&A – Tighten to Torque and Angle

The tool runs until with the specified speed in the forward direction until both target torque and target angle are reached. The target torque and the target angle must be set to > 0.

Parameter

Description

Target torque

Must be > 0.

Target angle

Default: 0. Must be > 0.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Brake

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Y – Tighten to Yield

This strategy runs the tool with the speed in the forward direction until the yield point is detected. The yield point is found by monitoring the torque gradient from the point where the torque goes above the Trigger Torque level, calculated based on Torque and Angle distance measurements. The Angle distance parameter is set according to the specified hardness of the joint.

Set the Gradient angle window (for hard joint, for soft joint or for manually setting of the Angle window). If Manual is selected, the Angle Window must be set. A joint is considered Hard if the screw is tightened to its full torque and it rotates 30 degrees or less after it has been tightened to its snug point. A Soft joint rotates 720 degrees or more after it has been tightened to its snug point. The hardness parameter defines the Angle Window for the gradient calculation. The harder the joint - the smaller the angle window.

Parameter

Description

Gradient Angle Window

Specifies Angle Window:

  • For Hard Joint: Angle Window = 1.

  • For Soft Joint: Angle Window = 20.

  • Manual: Manually set Angle Window.

Angle Window

Available when Gradient Angle Window is set to Manual. Must be > 0 and <= 100.

Trigger Torque

The angle measurement starts at this trigger. Must be >= 0 and < Tool MaxTorque.

Damping

Frequency in which the gradient is being calculated. Must be > 0 and < 100 and < Angle window.

Yield Point Percentage

Must be >= 20 %

Speed

Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Torque Filter Type

The type of the filter:

  • None: No filtering of the torque is used. The raw values are used as-is in the gradient calculation.

  • Five-point: The torque value used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over 5 torque samples.

  • Low pass: The torque values is filtered with a simple discrete Infinite Impulse Response filter.

  • Sliding Average: The torque values used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over a Number of Samples specified by the use.

Cut-off Frequency

Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Low pass:

  • 20 Hz

  • 40 Hz

  • 90 Hz

  • 200 Hz

  • 600 Hz

Number of Samples

Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Sliding Average:

  • 2

  • 4

  • 6

  • 8

  • 16

  • 32

Brake

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

ThCT – Thread Cutting to Torque

The Thread Cutting to Torque function enables tightening where the Rundown torque required is greater than the Rundown complete torque, for example when tightening thin layers of metal using self-threading (or selftapping) screws. The tool runs in forward direction until the Thread Cutting Angle (Aw) is reached. The thread cutting angle window is measured from when the torque passes Thread Cut Trigger Torque (Ttc) for the first time. From the point where Thread cutting angle is reached, the step continues to run until the Target Torque (Tt) is reached.

Parameter

Description

Target torque

Must be > 0.

Thread Cutting Angle Window

Default: 0. Must be > 0.

Trigger Torque

The angle measurement starts at this trigger.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Brake

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

RD – Rundown

Rundown step is the part of the tightening from when the screw enters the thread until just before the screw head touches the underlying surface and snug point is reached. The torque required during rundown does not contribute to any clamping force.

This step runs the tool with the speed in the forward direction, and depending on the Rundown Type, Torque or Snug the step behavior is as follows:

Rundown Type: To Torque: The step stops when the specified target torque is found.

Rundown Type: To Snug: The snug gradient calculation starts at the specified torque trigger level Tt. If no torque trigger is set the gradient calculation is started at the start of the step.

The slope calculation is made between two angle points Ad degrees apart and is calculated as: (Tn – Tn-1) / (An – An-1) and as soon as two slopes after each other are larger than TSLOPE the snug point is found.

Parameter

Description

Rundown type

To Torque or To Snug.

Target torque

Default: "not set". Must be > 0.

Speed

Default: 60 rpm. Must be > 0.

Speed ramp type

Hard, soft, or manual. Default: Hard. If you select Manual, the Speed ramp field opens.

Speed ramp

If Speed ramp type is Manual, this field opens. Default: 500 rpm/s.

Trigger Torque

If Rundown type is To Snug, the Trigger torque field is displayed.

Default: "not set". Must be > 0.

Delta Angle

If Rundown type is To Snug, the Delta angle field is displayed.

Default: "0". Must be > 0.

Torque Rate

If Rundown type is To Snug, the Torque rate field is displayed.

Default: "0". Must be > 0.

Brake

(Only valid for PF6 Flex and PF6 Stepsync controllers).

If On the tool will be stopped when the target is reached.

If Off the program goes directly to the next step without stopping the tool.

Engage (E)

This step runs the tool in both directions until the socket engages the screw. The step continues until Target torque or Target angle is reached, provided that Continue if not Engaged is set to Yes. If Target Angle is reached in any direction, the direction is reversed. Limit the search iterations by entering Max Engage Attempts. If Target Torque is reached in any direction the step will finish with OK status.

Ext - External Result

External result is a strategy used when an OK tightening is indicated by an external digital signal (and not by torque or angle values measured during tightening). This external signal can be provided through any means that can provide a digital signal to the tool.

When the signal is sent, the result view (logged data) will show the value of the Target parameter provided in the tightening program (specified torque value, angle value, or text string). These (torque and angle) values do not represent actual measured values, but only inserted text.

Parameter

Description

Torque <Target torque>

Numerical value for desired displayed target torque value. A signal could for example come from a Click Wrench and display <Target torque>.

Angle <Target angle>

Numerical value for desired displayed target angle value. A signal could for example come from a Click Wrench and display <Target angle>.

Text

Alphanumerical string for desired displayed text. For example: "Oil has been changed".

The following steps are not supported:

Step Label

Name

DI

Run until Digital Input - N/A

DT

Tighten to DynaTork - N/A

MWR

Mechatronic Wrench - N/A

WP

Wrench Production - N/A

WQ

Wrench Quality - N/A

C

Clutch - N/A

CL

Clutch Loosening - N/A

TM

Manual Tighten to Torque - N/A

Overview of Available Step Monitors

Step monitors are used to verify that the tightening was achieved according to the specification, for example, angle limits or torque. Each step has mandatory step monitors and optional step monitors. The mandatory monitors are included when dragging a new step to the multistep program. The optional monitors are flexible and can be added as needed in the multistep program. Each step can have up to eight monitors.

The Angle and Peak Torque monitors are automatically added by default to every step in a multistep tightening program.

A – Angle

This step monitor measures the maximum angle reached during the monitor and checks that it is between High limit and Low limit. The angle measurement starts at the start of the monitor or, if specified, at the point where the torque passes Trigger torque for the first time during the monitor.

Parameter

Description

Type

Four angle types are available: Peak angle (default), Angle at peak torque, Shut off angle, and Angle at end.

Trigger torque

The angle measurement starts at this trigger.

Low Limit

Lowest acceptable angle.

High Limit

Highest acceptable angle.

YA – Angle from Yield

This monitor measures the peak angle reached from the yield point and checks that the peak angle is within the limit.

Parameter

Description

Gradient Angle Window

Specifies Angle Window:

  • For Hard Joint: Angle Window = 1.

  • For Soft Joint: Angle Window = 20.

  • Manual: Manually set Angle Window.

Angle Window

Available when Gradient Angle Window is set to Manual. Must be > 0 and <= 100.

Yield Point Percentage

Must be >= 20 %

Trigger Torque

The angle measurement starts at this trigger. Must be > 0 and < Tool MaxTorque.

Damping

Frequency in which the gradient is being calculated. Must be > 0 and < 100 and < Angle window.

Low Limit

Lowest acceptable angle. Must be >= 0

High Limit

Highest acceptable angle. Must be > 0

Torque Filter Type

The type of the filter:

  • None: No filtering of the torque is used. The raw values are used as-is in the gradient calculation.

  • Five-point: The torque value used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over 5 torque samples.

  • Low pass: The torque values is filtered with a simple discrete Infinite Impulse Response filter.

  • Sliding Average: The torque values used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over a Number of Samples specified by the use.

Cut-off Frequency

Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Low pass:

  • 20 Hz

  • 40 Hz

  • 90 Hz

  • 200 Hz

  • 600 Hz

Number of Samples

Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Sliding Average:

  • 2

  • 4

  • 6

  • 8

  • 16

  • 32

MT – Mean Torque

This monitor measures the average torque during the monitor and checks the calculated value is within the limits.

Parameter

Description

Type

Specifies start condition:

  • Step Start: The measurement starts from step start and ends at the shut-off point.

  • Torque Trigger: The measurement starts at the point where the torque passes Torque Trigger for the first time. It ends at the shut-off point.

  • Angle Trigger: The measurement starts at the point where the angle is Angle Trigger, measured from the optional Trigger Torque, is reached. Without Trigger Torque, the Angle Trigger is measured from the start of the step. It ends at the shut-off point

  • Angle Window: Measures during an Angle Window. The window starts at the point where the torque passes Trigger Torque for the first time plus an angle offset, Angle Trigger.

  • Time Interval: Measures during the last Time Interval seconds of the tightening.

Torque Trigger

Available when Type is set to Trigger Torque, Angle Trigger or Angle Window. Must be >= 0 and < Tool Max Torque.

Angle Trigger

Available when Type is set to Angle Trigger or Angle Window. Must be > 0.

Angle Window

Available when Type is set to Angle Window. Must be > 0.

 

Time Interval

Available when Type is set to Time Interval. Must be > 0.

Low Limit

Lowest acceptable torque.

High Limit

Highest acceptable torque.

PT – Peak Torque

This step monitor measures the maximum torque reached during the monitor, including any over shoot, and checks that it is between High limit and Low limit.

Parameter

Description

Low Limit

Lowest acceptable torque.

High Limit

Highest acceptable torque.

PTCA – Post Thread Cut Angle

Measures the angle achieved during the monitoring and checks that it is between the specified angle limits. The Trigger Torque level is ignored until the end of the Thread cut angle window is reached. After that, the angle measuring starts as soon as the measured torque is above Trigger Torque. The parameter Stop Condition specifies where the angle measurement should end.

Parameter

Description

Trigger torque

Must be >= 0

Thread cutting angle window

Must be > 0

Angle measurement type

Peak angle

Angle at peak torque

Shut off angle

Angle at end

Thread cut trigger torque

Must be >= 0

Low Limit

Must be >= 0

High Limit

Must be > 0

Must be > Low limit

PTCPT – Post Thread Cut Peak Torque

Measures the maximum torque achieved during the monitoring, including any over-shoot, and checks that it is between the Torque limits. All torque values are ignored until the end of the Thread cut angle window has been reached.

Parameter

Description

Thread cut trigger torque

Must be >= 0

Thread cutting angle window

Must be > 0

Low Limit

Must be >= 0

High Limit

Must be > 0

Must be > Low limit

PVTH – Post View Torque High

This monitor checks that all torque values in the angle window are below the limit.

All torque values in the Angle Window Length should be below the High limit. The Angle Window starts at the angle degrees set in Start Angle in reverse direction from the shut-off point. This then spans for the angle degrees set in Angle Window Length in reverse direction. If Start Angle is left blank the Angle Window starts at the shut-off point. The torque values used in the monitor are based on the mean torque value, calculated over Number of Samples. If the total angle of the step is less than Start Angle plus Angle Window Length the monitor will report NOK.

Parameter

Description

Start Angle

Must be >= 0

Window length

Must be <= 0

Number of samples

1

High Limit

Highest acceptable torque.

PVTL – Post View Torque Low

Same as monitor Post View Torque High but this monitor checks that all torque values in the Angle Window Length are above Low Limit instead.

Parameter

Description

Start Angle

Must be >= 0

Window length

Must be <= 0

Number of samples

1

Low Limit

Lowest acceptable torque.

PrT – Prevailing Torque

The monitor calculates the prevailing torque value in the Window Length and checks that it is between the Torque limits. The Angle Window starts at the angle degrees set in Start Angle in reverse direction from the shut-off point. This then spans for the angle degrees set in Angle Window Length in reverse direction. If Start Angle is left blank the angle window starts at the shut-off point. The calculated prevailing torque value is the mean or peak torque value (depending on the parameter set by the user) during the Window Length. The calculated value is saved as result data Prevailing Torque Measured. If Torque compensation is set to On, the Prevailing Torque Measured will be subtracted from all torque result values in consecutive steps. Any previously calculated prevailing torque compensation values will no longer be subtracted from torque result values. If Torque compensation is set to No, no subtraction will be made in consecutive steps.

If the total angle of the step is less than the Start Angle plus Window Length, then the monitor will report NOK.

Prevailing torque can be measured as an average of measured values, or at peak torque. To choose between these two modes, set the Use Value parameter to either Mean torque (for average values), or Peak torque (for peak value).

Parameter

Description

Torque Compensation

On or off.

Start Angle

Must be > 0

Window length

Must be >= 0

Low Limit

Must be > 0

High Limit

Must be >= 0

Use value

Mean torque (for average values), or Peak torque (for peak value).

SOT – Shut Off Torque

The shut off point is the point where the step reaches its target. The torque is measured at the shut off point and checked to be between High limit and Low limit.

Parameter

Description

Low Limit

Lowest acceptable torque.

High Limit

Highest acceptable torque.

SOC – Shut Off Current

The shut off point is the point where the step reaches its target. The current is measured at the shut off point and checked to be between High limit and Low limit .

Parameter

Description

Low Limit

Lowest acceptable current.

High Limit

Highest acceptable current.

SSD - Stick Slip Detection

This step monitor detects and reports stick slip effects during a step. The detection is done by counting the number of times the torque falls below the Trigger Level. If the number of times is larger than Maximum Number of Oscillations then the stick slip error is reported. The monitor operates in two different modes, Dynamic or Fixed. The difference between the modes is the way that the Trigger level is calculated.

Dynamic Torque: Trigger Level is dynamically calculated as Peak Torque Percentage of the current max torque, which has been achieved so far during the monitoring. The monitoring is started as soon as the torque passes the Trigger Torque.

Fixed Torque: Trigger Level is the fixed Trigger Torque specified by the user. In this mode the percentage is not needed.

If the torque never reaches the Trigger Torque then the monitoring is not started, this will result in status NOK.

Parameter

Description

Type

Specifies what type of Stick slip detection that will be done in the monitor Stick Slip detection. Default: Dynamic torque.

Peak Torque Percentage

Default: 80%, Must be >=10 and < 100.

Trigger Torque

Default: 5, Must be >= 0 and < Tool max torque.

Maximum Number of Oscillations

Default: 5, Must be >= 3 and <20.

Ti – Time

Measures the elapsed time during the monitor and checks that it is between the time limits. The time measurement starts at the start of the monitor and, if the Trigger Torque is specified, at the point where the torque passes Trigger Torque for the first time during the monitor.

Parameter

Description

Trigger Torque

Must be >= 0 and < Tool max torque.

Low Limit

Must be >= 0

High Limit

Must be > 0

Must be > Low limit

TG – Torque Gradient

This monitor checks the gradient is within the limit.

Parameter

Description

Gradient Angle Window

Specifies Angle Window:

  • For Hard Joint: Angle Window = 1.

  • For Soft Joint: Angle Window = 20.

  • Manual: Manually set Angle Window.

Angle Window

Available when Gradient Angle Window is set to Manual. Must be > 0 and <= 100.

End Point Check

If set to Yes, only the gradient measured at the shut off point of the step is checked to be within the limits.

Trigger Torque

The angle measurement starts at this trigger. Must be > 0 and < Tool MaxTorque.

Damping

Frequency in which the gradient is being calculated. Must be > 0 and < 100 and < Angle window.

Low Limit

Lowest acceptable torque gradient. Must be >= -100.

High Limit

Highest acceptable torque gradient. Must be > -100 and > Low limit.

Torque Filter Type

The type of the filter:

  • None: No filtering of the torque is used. The raw values are used as-is in the gradient calculation.

  • Five-point: The torque value used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over 5 torque samples.

  • Low pass: The torque values is filtered with a simple discrete Infinite Impulse Response filter.

  • Sliding Average: The torque values used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over a Number of Samples specified by the use.

Cut-off Frequency

Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Low pass:

  • 20 Hz

  • 40 Hz

  • 90 Hz

  • 200 Hz

  • 600 Hz

Number of Samples

Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Sliding Average:

  • 2

  • 4

  • 6

  • 8

  • 16

  • 32

Angle Offset

Available when End Point Check is set to No. Specifies the degrees that the calculation of the gradient start after the trigger torque is passed for the first time.

TAW – Torque in Angle Window

This monitor checks that all torque values in the angle window are within the torque limits.

Parameter

Description

Trigger Torque

Must be >= 0

Start Angle

Must be > 0

Window Length

Must be <= 0

Low Limit

Must be >= 0

High Limit

Must be > 0

Must be > Low limit

NOK if window is passed

If set to Yes, status of this monitor is NOK if the end of angle window is not reached.

TRD – Torque Rate and Deviation

This step monitor measures and checks the torque rate, i.e. the ratio of torque vs. angle. The calculated torque rate is checked if it is within the torque rate limits defined by High Limit and Low Limit.

Parameter

Description

Trigger Torque

Torque of the angle start point.

Start Point Angle

When Start point angle has been measured from Trigger torque the measuring of the torque starts.

End Point Angle

Angle point where the measuring of the torque is stopped.

End Point Torque

Torque where the measuring of the torque is stopped.

Low Limit

Lowest acceptable torque.

High Limit

Highest acceptable torque.

Limit

Must be > 0

Tstart = Torque from where AngleStart starts
Tstop = Torque where the measuring of the torque is stopped.
Astart = When AngleStart has been measured from TorqueStart the torque starts to be measured.
Astop = Angle point where the measuring of the torque is stopped.
TRL = Low Limit
TRH = High Limit

The following monitors are not supported:

Monitor

Description

CL

Click - N/A

LD

Loosening Detection - N/A

Overview of Available Step Restrictions

To make sure the tightening stops if something unexpected happens, it is possible to add restrictions to the multistep tightening program. These restrictions could, for example, test that a maximum torque is not reached or that a part of the multistep tightening does not take too long to run. Each step has its own set of mandatory step restrictions and optional step restrictions. The mandatory restrictions are included when dragging a new step to the multistep program. All steps can have up to four restrictions each.

The following restrictions are automatically added to every step that is added to the multistep tightening program:

Default step restrictions

Step Restriction

Applicable Steps

Maximum Time

All

Maximum Torque

  • Tighten to Angle

  • Tighten to Torque+Angle

  • Wait

  • Socket release

Maximum Angle

  • Tighten to Torque

  • Wait

  • Run until Digital Input

  • Loosen to Torque

  • Thread Cutting to Torque

  • Rundown

  • Tighten to Yield

CTh – Cross Thread

This restriction checks the angle from the point where torque passes Start torque (T1) to the point where the torque passes End torque (T2). If the angle measured from Start torque (T1) is higher than Maximum limit (Amax), the tool is stopped immediately.

When the torque passes End torque (T2), the measured angle is checked against the limit Minimum limit (Amin). If the angle is lower than this limit, the tool is stopped immediately.

Parameter

Description

In illustration

Start Torque

Must be <=0.

T1

End Torque

Must be <=0.

T2

Minimum Limit

The low angle limit.

Amin

Maximum Limit

The high angle limit.

Amax

A – Maximum Angle

This restriction measures the angle. If the measured angle reaches the Maximum Limit, the tool is stopped immediately. The angle is measured from the start of the restriction or, if specified, from the point where the torque passes Trigger Torque for the first time during the restriction.

Parameter

Description

Trigger Torque

If specified, this is the torque from where the angle is measured.

Maximum Limit

If this limit is reached the tool is stopped immediately.

T – Maximum Torque

This restriction checks the torque. If the measured torque exceeds the Maximum limit, the tool is stopped immediately.

Parameter

Description

Maximum Limit

If the torque reaches this specified limit the tool is stopped immediately.

Ti – Maximum Time

This restriction checks the time. If Maximum Limit is reached, the tool is stopped immediately.

Parameter

Description

Maximum Limit

If this time is elapsed, the tool is stopped immediately.

Rh – Rehit

This restriction checks the torque. If the measured torque exceeds the Detection Torque, the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the end of the program. It is only possible to add step Rehit restriction to the first step of the multistep tightening program. Once the Rehit restriction has been added to the first step it shall not be possible to move the step to any other position within the tightening program. The Rehit restriction has to be deleted from the first step in order to move it to other position in the tightening program.

Parameter

Description

Detection Torque

If the measured torque exceeds the Detection Torque, the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the end of the program. Must be greater than zero.

RT – Rescinding Torque

This restriction checks the torque and if the measured torque drops below the condition of the restriction the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to end of the program. There are two methods of Rescinding Torque Restrictions for Torque and Angle control processes

Parameter

Description

Type

Torque control processes or Angle control processes.

Torque control processes: Torque control processes checks the torque. If the measured torque drops below the Rescinding Torque Limit the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the end of the program. For the restriction to be active the torque must first exceed 110 % of the Rescinding Torque Limit

Angle control processes: This restriction checks the maximum torque reached during the restriction. For the restriction to be active the torque must first exceed the Trigger Torque. If the measured torque drops below the maximum torque for longer time than Rescinding Torque Time the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the end of the program.

Rescinding Torque Limit

Default: 10 Nm. Must be > 0.

TG – Torque Gradient

This restriction checks the gradient and if it is outside the limits the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the end of the program.

Parameter

Description

Gradient Angle Window

Specifies Angle Window:

  • For Hard Joint: Angle Window = 1.

  • For Soft Joint: Angle Window = 20.

  • Manual: Manually set Angle Window.

Angle Window

Available when Gradient Angle Window is set to Manual. Must be > 0 and <= 100.

Trigger Torque

Must be > 0 and < Tool MaxTorque.

Damping

Frequency in which the gradient is being calculated. Must be > 0 and < 100 and < Angle window.

Minimum Limit

Must be >= -100.

Maximum Limit

Must be > -100 and > Low limit.

Torque Filter Type

The type of the filter:

  • None: No filtering of the torque is used. The raw values are used as-is in the gradient calculation.

  • Five-point: The torque value used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over 5 torque samples.

  • Low pass: The torque values is filtered with a simple discrete Infinite Impulse Response filter.

  • Sliding Average: The torque values used in the calculation are filtered using a sliding average filter over a Number of Samples specified by the use.

Cut-off Frequency

Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Low pass:

  • 20 Hz

  • 40 Hz

  • 90 Hz

  • 200 Hz

  • 600 Hz

Number of Samples

Needs to be specified when Torque Filter Type is set to Sliding Average:

  • 2

  • 4

  • 6

  • 8

  • 16

  • 32

TAW – Torque in Angle Window

This restriction checks that the measured torque in the Angle Window Length is between the Torque limits. If the measured torque is outside the limits the tool is stopped immediately and the program jumps to the end. The Angle Window Length starts at the Start Angle from the point that the torque first passed the Trigger Torque. If Trigger Torque is not set, then the Start Angle begins at the start of the restriction.

If the end of the Angle Window Length is not reached, the status of the restriction is NOK.

Parameter

Description

Trigger Torque

Must be >= 0

Start Angle

Must be >= 0

Window Length

Must be >0

Minimum Limit

Must be >= 0

Maximum Limit

Must be <= Minimum limit

TCD - Torque vs Current Deviation

This restriction verifies that all current measurements converted to the corresponding torque are, at most, the Maximum deviation away from the actual torque measured with the torque transducer. The restriction starts when the torque reaches Trigger Torque for the first time during the step and is active until the step reaches its target.

If Trigger Torque is never reached, the monitor will report OK.

Parameter

Description

Trigger Torque

Must be >= 0

Maximum Deviation

Default: 1, Must be > 0

Tightening Program Properties

General settings

Parameter

Description

Name

A user-defined name for the multistep program.

Thread Direction

Direction of the threads, either clockwise or counterclockwise

Loosening Program

Indicate if a loosening program is available. Choose from the list of available loosening programs in the software.

Type

Type of program, either Tightening or Loosening

Program Start

Sets the torque level for generating a result. If left blank, the result is generated every time the tool is started; otherwise result is only generated from the set torque level.

True Angle Compensation

Tools equipped with a gyro can measure the tool rotation during tightening. If the tool is rotated during tightening, the angle measurement may be corrupted. This leads to faulty tightening if made to angle references. With True Angle Compensation the tool can compensate for these rotations and make a correct tightening.

Only tools equipped with a gyro have the capability to measure the tool rotation.

True Angle Compensation is not supported for ICB tools.

True Angle Compensation is not supported for tools with a crowfoot (Gear Front Attachment) installed.

Program Monitor

Parameter

Description

Angle

Turn angle monitoring On or Off for the entire program. If Active in steps and Trigger Torque are left blank, angle monitoring will start at program start.

Active in steps

Sets a range of steps the angle monitoring is valid for. If no end step is specified, angle monitoring will stop at the last step of the program that is not a Socket Release step.

Type

Type of angle monitoring. Choose between:

  • Peak Angle: the highest angle reached during the monitor

  • Angle at Peak Torque: the angle at the point where the highest torque was reached during the monitor

  • Shut Off Angle: the angle at the shut-off point of the step

  • Angle at End: the angle at the end of the monitor, including the brake, if active.

Trigger torque

Sets the value of the trigger torque for angle monitoring.

Low limit

Sets angle monitoring (program) lower limit

High limit

Sets angle monitoring (program) higher limit

Program Restrictions

Parameter

Description

Maximum Time Limit

Set amount in seconds. This restriction checks the total time for the tightening and if it exceeds the Time High limit the tool is stopped immediately. The time is measured from the start of the program.

Maximum Torque Limit

This restriction checks the torque and if the measured torque exceeds the Torque High limit the tool is stopped immediately.

Validation

During the configuration of tightening programs, the entered values are compared with the tool capability values to prevent parameters being outside the selected limits. User-defined maximum values are useful if many different tools are being used.

Parameter

Description

Validate against tool values

On: entered values are compared with the tool capability values

Off: no validation performed

Tool

Shows the tool to compare the values with.

Attachment Tuning

Attachment tuning gives the possibility to compensate for front attachments on the tool. The compensation can be made for each tightening program.

An operator can hot swap attachments and then select a tightening program tuned for that specific attachment.

Parameter

Description

Use Attachment Tuning

Yes or No

Gear Ratio

The Attachment gear ratio is needed to compensate the angle.

Minimum: 0.5

Maximum: 3.6

Socket rotation speed = Tool speed / gear ratio

Efficiency Tuning

Attachment gear ratio combined with the Efficiency tuning is needed to compensate the torque.

Minimum: 0.5

Maximum: 1.0

For example 0.9 means 10% efficiency loss.

Configuring a Tightening Program

  • Adding a Tightening Program
  • Deleting a Tightening Program
  • Creating a Multistep Program

Adding a Tightening Program

  1. Go to Tightening in the home menu and select Multistep program library in the left pane.

  2. Select the plus icon and choose the appropriate type of program in the dialog box (Tightening or Loosening).

  3. Continue with adding steps, monitors, and restrictions to the program in the tightening area.

    A maximum of 16 steps can be added to a tightening program.

Relevant Information
  • Creating a Multistep Program

Deleting a Tightening Program

  1. Go to Tightening in the home menu and select Multistep program library in the left pane.

  2. Select the multistep tightening program that is to be deleted.

  3. In the program itself, at the bottom left, select Delete.

  4. Confirm by selecting Yes in the dialog box.

Creating a Multistep Program

To create a multistep program, drag and drop steps, monitors and restrictions in the tightening area.

Steps can only be placed between the start and end points of the program, whilst monitors and restrictions can only be placed on steps.

Function

Description

Start and end points

Start and end points of the multistep program. All steps must be placed between these two points.

Adding a step

Drag a step from the list and drop it in the desired position between the start and end points.

Moving a step

Click and hold a step and move it to the desired position

Showing step properties

Click on the step to reveal the properties

Closing step properties

Click anywhere in the tightening area to close the properties menu

Deleting a step

Open the step properties and click Delete at the bottom of the menu

Adding a restriction/monitor

Drag a restriction/monitor from the list and drop it on the appropriate step.

Moving a restriction/monitor

Click and hold the icon (checkmark for monitor, stop sign for restriction) and drag and drop it on the appropriate step

Showing restriction/monitor properties

Click on the restriction/monitor icon to reveal the properties menu

Closing restriction/monitor properties

Click anywhere in the tightening area to close the properties menu

Deleting a restriction/monitor

Open the restriction/monitor properties and click on Delete at the bottom of the menu

Step error

When a validation error occurs in a step, that step will be marked. Note that when the step properties are opened, the parameter causing the error will also be marked.

Monitor/Restriction error

When a validation error occurs in a monitor or restriction, that monitor or restriction will be marked. Note that when the monitor/restriction properties are opened, the parameter causing the error will also be marked.

Forbidden placement

When a particular placement (of a step, monitor or restriction) is not allowed, the placeholder icon will not be shown.

Working with the Batch Sequence Tab

Batch sequences are used to perform a specified number of tightenings in a specific order.

The tightening order can either follow a fixed scheme, or be left to the operator to decide in a free-order scheme. In either case, the sockets or signals can be used to communicate between the tool and the operator.

  • A Batch is set up to perform a specified number of consecutive tightenings using the same tightening program. Batches must have tightening program and batch size specified in order to run.

  • A Batch Sequence is an ordered set of batches, when the operation requires a combination of batches/tightening programs.

A batch sequence can consist of up to 99 batches, with a batch size of up to 250 tightenings. The batches in a batch sequence are carried out in the order listed, or by using a socket selector to choose which batch to run.

A batch sequence is completed (and the tool may be locked) when either:

  • All tightenings have been completed with an OK or NOK result.

  • The Sequence Abort Timer signal terminates the task. Unperformed tightenings are reported with NOK result.

In this Section
  • Batch Sequence Settings
  • Adding a New Batch to a Batch Sequence
  • Deleting a Batch from a Batch Sequence

Batch Sequence Settings

The Batch Sequence menu shows the details of a single batch sequence with the following configuration items:

  • Name: Sequence name and index number.

  • Settings: Parameters for controlling the flow and order of tightenings.

  • Batch Configuration: Function for creating the batch sequence from individual tightening programs. A batch consists of one single tightening program that is repeated a number of times.

Batch Sequence Name

Parameter

Description

Name

The batch sequence name consists of an index number combined with optional characters. The index position cannot be changed. A new configuration is given lowest possible available index number. The index number is important when using sources and identifier numbers to be part of the task selection process.

Batch Sequence Settings

Parameter

Description

Default Value

Lock tool on Batch sequence compl.

A batch sequence is completed when the batch sequence counter is equal to the batch sequence size.

On: The tool is locked and a tightening program or batch sequence must be selected to continue performing tightenings.

Off: After completion, the batch sequence is ready to be repeated.

On

Free order

No: The configured batches will be executed in the order listed, provided they have been configured to perform tightenings. If socket has been specified, the system will prompt for the socket when the batch is to be performed.

Yes: The configured batches can be executed in any order. The operator must indicate to the system which batch is to be executed by using a Socket selector.

A batch is regarded as complete when all joints have been completed.

No

Increment on NOK

Makes it possible to increment the batch counter value even though the tightening is reported as NOK. For Max consecutive NOK to work (the maximum number of times a single bolt can be tightenened), Increment on NOK must be set to No. Setting this parameter to Yes, will allow the sequence to move on to the next tightening.

No

Max consecutive NOK

Maximum consecutive not OK (NOK) tightenings are a defined maximum allowed number of NOK consecutive tightenings in a batch. If the Max consecutive NOK number is reached, the event Too many NOK tightenings (4020) is displayed.

0

Decrement on OK loosening

Decrements the counter within the currently active batch. Completed batch cannot be decremented.

Never: The setting is off. Counter is not decremented when loosening is performed in the active batch.

Always: decrements the counter in the active batch when loosening, if the last tightening was OK.

When last tightening is OK: decrements the counter when performing a loosening in the active batch, regardless of the previous tightening result.

Never

Sequence abort timer

On: The selected batch sequence can be aborted within a specified time limit

Off: The selected batch sequence cannot be aborted.

Off

Abort time

Time in seconds.

10 s

Batch Configuration Parameters

Parameter

Description

Tightening program

The tightening program to use with the batch.

Batch size

Number of tightenings the batch will perform.

Max. number of tightenings in one batch is 99.

Batch size 0 will give the batch an infinite number of tightenings.

Identifier number

When using a socket selector, this is the socket position used to activate the batch.

Adding a New Batch to a Batch Sequence

  1. Go to Batch Sequence in the home menu. The workspace displays a list of batch sequences.

  2. Select the plus icon in the top right corner.

  3. Issue the batch sequence with a name.

  4. Select the relevant parameters in the settings.

  5. Select Batch Configuration > Edit.

  6. Select a Tightening Program for the batch.

  7. Enter the Batch Size, that is, the number of tightenings the batch will consist of.

  8. Enter an optional Identifier Number.

The new batch sequence will be issued the first free position in the sequence list. If there are no free slots it will be placed at the bottom of the list and assigned the lowest available index number. It is not possible to change the index number to rearrange the batch tightening order.

Deleting a Batch from a Batch Sequence

  1. Go to Batch Sequence in the home menu. The workspace displays a list of batch sequences.

  2. Select the Batch Sequence to be deleted.

  3. In the bottom of the workspace, select the Delete button.

When a batch is deleted from the batch sequence, the index sequence is compressed and updated, leaving no gaps. The index number of the deleted batch sequence will be assigned automatically to the next sequence that is created.

Working with the Sources Tab

External signals used as tasks for tightenings are configured in the Sources menu. Sources are accessories or similar connected to a virtual station. Two types of source tasks are available:

  • Source Tightening task: used to select a single tightening program.

  • Source Batch task: used to select a batch sequence, that is, a series of tightening programs.

In this Section
  • Source Tightening
  • Source Batch

Source Tightening

Source tightenings link a specific tightening program to an identifier number. When the identifier number is sent to the tool (either by external digital signal, or, in cases where a socket selector is used, by lifting the corresponding socket in the selector) the linked program will run over and over until a different signal is sent (or socket is picked up). There is no batch counting.

To link separate lists to the virtual station, a source task must be assigned to the virtual station. Go to Integrated Controller Tool > Virtual Station in the home menu and select Task > Change task.

Relevant Information
  • Assigning a Task to a Virtual Station
In this Section
  • Source Tightening Properties
  • Configuring a Source Tightening

Source Tightening Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

The name issued to the source tightening.

Selector mode

Control mode: An external source selects a tightening program by requesting an identifier number. The identifier number is linked to a corresponding socket in the socket selector, and by lifting the socket the tightening program is selected

Confirm mode: The socket selector cannot be used as a controlling source. In this mode identifier numbers are linked to both a tightening program and a specific socket (indicated in an additional column in the list). When an identifier number is requested (by an external signal), the corresponding socket is prompted in the socket selector and the tightening program is activated when the operator lifts the socket (other sockets are disabled). If no socket is specified (that is, set to 0 in the Socket column), the tightening program is activated directly and the socket status is ignored.

Max consecutive NOK per program

On: The batch will advance even if a NOK tightening is performed.

Off: Set Max consecutive NOK for the tightening. The batch will only advance if a successful tightening is performed.

Max consecutive NOK

Set the number of consecutive NOK results to be allowed. If the value is set to 0, there is no check performed for NOK tightenings. When reaching max consecutive NOK, the tool locks and the sequence execution is halted.

Batch control

Select how the source tightening is to be executed.

Internal: Configure how many times a source tightening is to be repeated.

External: Configure how many times a source tightening should be executed by using Open protocol or an external protocol. Any configuration change clears the source tightening to start over from a clean and known state (the batch count in the batch will be reset to 0). Ongoing tightenings are able to finish before the changes take effect. 

Configuring a Source Tightening

  1. Go to Sources in the home menu, and select Tightening in the left pane.

  2. Select the plus icon in the top right.

  3. Issue the source tightening with a Name and select the correct Selector mode (Control or Confirm, depending on what is required).

  4. Max consecutive NOK can be set per source tightening or per individual program included in the source tightening. Set Max consecutive NOK per program parameter to Yes or No, depending on what is required:

    • To set the max consecutive NOK per source tightening, set Max consecutive NOK per program to No. Set the value in the Max consecutive NOK field.

    • To set the max consecutive NOK per program, set Max consecutive NOK per program to Yes. For every program in the Identifier selector configuration section, set the value in the Max NOK column.

  5. By default, only one editable identifier number will be available when creating a new source tightening. At the bottom of the screen, select the plus icon to add more.

  6. Give every item an identifier number.

    If a socket selector is used, the identifier numbers will correspond to the positions in the socket selector, that is, identifier number 1 corresponds to socket number 1 in the socket selector.

  7. Choose a tightening program to link to each identifier number by selecting a row and choosing from the list of tightening programs.

Source Batch

  • Configuring a Source Batch
  • Significant Positions
    • Significant Positions to Read in Barcode String
    • Combining Identifier Strings
    • Saved Positions

Configuring a Source Batch

  1. Go to Sources in the home menu and select Batch Sequence in the left pane.

  2. Select the plus icon in the top right.

  3. Issue the source batch with a Name.

  4. Set the Abort on new identifier to Yes if scanning a new identifier string should abort the previous scan.

  5. Select the Identifier method (Strings for text, or Number for numerical values)

    If the Identifier method is set to Strings, continue with the following steps:

  6. Set Free order to On if the strings should be able to be scanned in any order.

    Identifier strings can be made up of up to four different strings. When free order is set to Off, the strings must be scanned in a specific order for the system to recognize the string.

  7. If required, add an identifier string by selecting the plus icon in the Identifier string configuration section.

  8. Select the Name label for the identifier string that is to be changed. In the dialog box, the following properties can be indicated per string:

    • Name - the name of the string

    • Length - the length of the string. See Combining Identifier Strings for more information on concatenating strings.

    • Significant positions - the relevant positions in the string. See Significant Positions to Read in Barcode String for more information on significant positions.

    • Saved positions - which positions are to be logged by the system. See Saved Positions for more information about Saved positions.

    The ID number (1−4) in the string properties window cannot be altered, but can only be used to navigate between the different strings.

    An error may occur when Free order is set to On, and the lengths of the different strings are duplicated. The scanned sequence will then not activate a tightening program. To remedy this error, set Free order to Off, or adjust the string lengths.

  9. Select Edit in the bottom of the Identifier String Configuration field.

    In the Edit window, indicate which strings (in the String contains column) that are to be linked to which batch sequence (in the Activates column). Select the plus icon at the bottom to add more strings.

    Wildcards can be used when typing the "string contains". The wildcard(s) can be used at any position in the string. No batch sequence is activated in case of an ambiguous matching result.

    The wildcard is a . (period)

Relevant Information
  • Saved Positions

Significant Positions

Significant positions are used to specify which characters in the barcode string to read when putting together the string to match with your pre-defined string. The number of significant positions must match the number of characters in the pre-defined strings.

In this Section
  • Significant Positions to Read in Barcode String
  • Combining Identifier Strings
  • Saved Positions

Significant Positions to Read in Barcode String

The positions in the barcode string are associated with a number between 1 and 1024. The first position of the string is 1 and the last is 1024.

The significant positions must be specified following the rules described in the table below.

Description

Significant positions

Valid configuration

Barcode string to match with pre-defined string

Significant positions in order

1,2,3,7,8

Ok

ABCGH

Significant positions in optional order

7,1,2,3,8

Ok

GABCH

Range of numbers

1–3,7-8

Ok

ABCGH

Combining Identifier Strings

The identifier string is used for matching a combination of up to four strings from a factory management system or up to four scanner inputs that need to be combined into one string.

The plus and minus buttons manage how many strings that are combined. The following parameters are available:

Parameters for combining identifier strings

Parameter

Description

Name

The string must be given a name.

Length

The length of the string must be known and must be entered. This is important to be able to combine the correct string identifier.

Significant positions

The comma-separated positions or ranges (separated by hyphen) in the combined string that are used for matching.

Saved positions

The comma-separated positions or ranges in the strings that will be saved in the result.

The start and end parameters in each row define the individual string positions in the combined string identifier, that is used in the next step of the matching process.

The first part in the task selection process when using an identifier string as an input, is to define which positions in the string that are to be activated:

  • Enter the significant positions, to define which positions in the identifier string that will be used for matching. The positions must be either comma-separated, or by range.

Saved Positions

Saved positions is a field where the user can indicate which parts of each string used in the Source Batch will be saved, and how they will be represented in the log. In this field, indicate the positions in the string that need to be saved. Positions can constitute only parts of the entire string. If the field is left empty, the entire (concatenated) string will be saved. The table below shows some examples of saved position combinations.

Saved position values are comma-separated (without spaces), and ranges are indicated using a hyphen.

Identifier string

Positions

String 1: 1234567

1-7

String 2: abcdef

8-13

String 3: GHIJKL

14-19

String 4: 890

20-22

Saved position examples

Saved positions

Saved results

(empty)

1234567abcdefGHIJKL890

1-3,9,11,15,20-22

123bdH890

8-12,1-7,19,20-21 will be changed automatically to: 1-12,19-21

1234567abcdeL89

Working with the Configurations Tab

Configurations of the tool and its accessories are made in the Configurations menu.

In this Section
  • Tool Configuration
  • Configuring a Socket Selector
  • Configuring an I/O Expander or an I/O Hub
  • General Virtual Station
  • Configuring Result Presentation Settings

Tool Configuration

The following section describes how different tool functions, such as LEDs and buttons, can be configured.

In this Section
  • 1. Function Button
  • 2. LED Ring
  • 3. Direction Switch
  • 4. Buzzer
  • General Settings
  • Start Condition
  • Accessory Bus

1. Function Button

The function button on the tool can be configured to control up to six available input signals. The button’s three possible condition states are combined with the two possible states of the direction switch.

The function button is not available for ICB tools.

Configure the function button:
  1. Go to Configurations in the home menu and select Tool Configurations > Edit.

  2. Select 1. Function Button > Edit.

  3. Set the parameters as applicable:

    Function Button States

    Direction Switch State

    Pressed

    CW

    Single push

    CW

    Double push

    CW

    Pressed

    CCW

    Single push

    CCW

    Double push

    CCW

    Each of the six input signal combinations can be assigned one of the following items:

    Item

    Abort sequence

    Acknowledge events

    Activate tool scanner

    Batch decrement

    Batch increment

    Bypass tightening program

    Master unlock

    Reset batch

    Reset batch sequence

    Reset too many NOK

    Select next identifier number

    Select previous identifier number

    Unlock tool on complete

    Unlock tool on disable

  4. Set the Detection Interval parameters:

    Parameter

    Description

    Default Value

    Push detection interval

    For single push: the maximum push time (in milliseconds) between the button being pressed and the button being released.

    300 ms

    Next push interval

    For double push: the maximum time (in milliseconds) between the button being released after the first push, and the button being pressed again.

    300 ms

2. LED Ring

The tool LEDs have the following features:

  • The blue LED is located next to the LED ring. An output signal can be connected to the LED and provides an output message to the operator.

  • The LED ring consists of a red, a yellow and a green ring. Output signals can be connected to the LEDs and provide output messages to the operator.

  • A result indicator uses the LED rings. Tightening result signals can be connected to the LEDs and provide output messages to the operator at the end of the tightening.

An output signal can be of the type Event or of the type State.

A state signal is active as long as the state is active.

An event signal is active during a programmable time range.

Blue LED

The blue LED is a single LED with a steady signal.

Configure the blue LED
  1. Select the signal that shall be connected to the blue LED from a shortcut menu.

  2. For a signal of the type Event, select the duration of the signal.

Result Indicator

A pre-configured pattern can be selected from a shortcut menu. This pattern can be a combination of tightening results.

Configure the result indicator:
  1. Select the signal message that is to be displayed from a shortcut menu.

    Signal

    Description

    None

    No LEDs are activated after the tightening, regardless of the result

    Red:high:yellow:low

    Either a red LED indicates the final value is too high, or a yellow LED indicates the value is too low, if the tightening is terminated incorrectly (NOK).

    Red:NOK:yellow:low

    A red LED indicates that the tightening is terminated incorrectly (NOK). An additional yellow LED can indicate if the value is too low.

    Red:NOK

    A red LED indicates that the tightening is terminated incorrectly (NOK). No additional LEDs are shown.

    Red:high(Prio):yellow:low

    If NOK reason is that High target angle/torque has been reached the High indication will suppress any Low indication

  2. Select the duration of the signal.

  • An LED is turned on when a tightening is terminated and the LED is part of the result indicator configuration.

  • An LED is turned off when a tightening has been performed and the LED is not part of the result indicator configuration.

  • An LED is turned off when the maximum time is exceeded after a tightening has been performed.

  • An LED is turned off when the next tightening is started.

  • An LED is turned off and replaced by another LED signal pattern when an LED ring configuration is activated by an output signal.

LED Ring

The LED Ring consists of three circles of LED lamps, red, yellow, and green. Each circle can have a steady signal or a flashing signal. This provides a total of six different signals that can be connected to the LED ring.

Configure the LED ring
  1. Select the signal that is to be connected to the LED color and select input item from a shortcut menu.

  2. For an input item of the type Event, select the duration of the signal.

  • An LED is turned on only when no tightening is ongoing and when the controlling output signal is activated.

  • An LED is turned off when the maximum time is exceeded. Only applicable if the signal type is an Event.

  • An LED is turned off when the next tightening is started.

  • An LED is turned off when the controlling output signal is deactivated. Only applicable if the signal type is a State.

3. Direction Switch

The direction switch on the tool can be configured to trigger one input signal when quickly switched from clockwise (CW) to counter clockwise (CCW) and back, or vice versa.

Configure the direction switch
  1. Go to Configurations in the home menu and select Tool Configurations > Edit.

  2. Select 3. Direction Switch > Edit

  3. Select Input and choose an item from the list.

4. Buzzer

The buzzer can be configured to emit different sounds. Output signals can be mapped to each of the signals and provides an audio interface to the operator.

The buzzer is configured by assigning a sound to a signal selected from a list of available signals. A signal with a sound can be prioritized between 1 and 10 where 1 is highest priority and 10 the lowest. By default a signal and sound has the priority 5.

Up to 20 different signals can be mapped to a sound and each sound can have its own characteristic profile, with parameters described in the table below. For two simultaneous signals, the signal with the highest priority overrides the other signal.

A buzzer signal runs until termination and is not interrupted by a higher prioritized signal.

Configure the buzzer
  1. Go to Configurations in the home menu and select Tool Configurations > Edit.

  2. Select 4. Buzzer > Edit

  3. Select the plus icon to add a new sound configuration to the table.

  4. Set the parameters as applicable:

    Parameter

    Description

    Priority

    10 different priority levels are available for the sounds where one (1) is the highest priority level. Default priority level is five.

    Frequency (0Hz, 400Hz - 4000Hz)

    Exact frequency in Hz.

    Time On

    Time (in ms) that the buzzer emits a sound.

    Time off

    Time (in ms) that the buzzer is quiet.

    Repeats

    Number of times the buzzer repeats the on/off sequence.

    Volume

    The buzzer volume, in percentage of max volume.

General Settings

Item

Description

Inactivity timeout

On: In order to save battery time there is an option to automatically turn off the tool after a certain time of inactivity.

Off: The tool will not be turned off due to inactivity.

Inactivity timeout

Time in minutes. Enter a value between 1-1440 minutes.

Front LED

On: Front LED is lit when the tool trigger is pressed.

Off: Front LED will always be off.

Duration after trigger released

Front LED duration in seconds, starting when the tool trigger is released

Tightening program selection

On: LED ring provides visualization of currently selected tightening program in a sequence.

Off: Function deactivated.

Start Condition

The way to start the tool is configurable via the Start source setting. The default value is Trigger only.

Options for Start Source

Item

Description

Trigger only

Press the tool trigger to start the tightening.

Safety Trigger

Two triggers (as with trigger and push) activated within 500 ms from each other to start the tightening.

Accessory Bus

Tool accessories are connected to the tool through the accessory bus.

Accessory bus configurations

Accessory Type

Description

TLS Tag

Tool Location System tag used to provide output signaling to the operator.

EHMI

A small display and buttons used to select tasks or programs according to the configuration.

Scanner

Barcode scanner.

In this Section
  • TLS Tag
  • EHMI
  • Scanner

TLS Tag

The Tool Location System (TLS) tag is a tool accessory. The TLS tag is installed on the tool and connected to the tool accessory bus. The TLS tag is part of the Ubisense positioning system and is handled independently from the tool. In addition to the positioning, the TLS tag can be used to provide information to the operator. Selected output signals can generate different LED light combinations.

Up to 10 different output signals can be mapped to a light priority.

If there are two simultaneous signals, the signal with the highest priority takes precedence. When two signals with the same priority trigger the LED, the first signal received takes precedence.

TLS Tag Configuration Parameters

Parameter

Description

Signal

Select a signal to trigger the LED light from a shortcut menu.

For a signal of the type Event, select the duration of the signal.

Color

Select a color for the LED.

Priority

10 priority levels are available for the sounds where one (1) is the highest priority level. Default priority level is five (5).

An output signal can be of type Event or of type State.

A state signal is active as long as the state is active.

An event signal is active during programmable time.

EHMI

The EHMI is a tool accessory. It is installed on the tool and connected to the tool accessory bus. It has a graphical display, three function buttons, and an optional scanner. The display is a subset of the IxB Software web user interface, with the possibility to select tightening programs, batch sequences, and to view results from tightenings.

In the EHMI configuration it is possible to decide if the function buttons are On or Off.

EHMI Function Buttons

Parameter

Description

Enable function button

On: The function buttons have full functionality to configure settings within the visible menus.

Off: The function buttons can only be used to acknowledge a necessary dialog on the EHMI.

Scanner

The Scanner is a tool accessory. It is installed on the tool and connected to the tool accessory bus.

In the scanner configuration it is possible to decide if the scanner should have pass through mode On or Off.

Configuring a Socket Selector

The Socket Selector is a socket tray with LEDs that assists the operator in selecting the correct socket for the tightening procedure, for example, a batch sequence. When using more than one tightening program, it is convenient to use a selector. When a socket is lifted, the corresponding tightening program is selected.

Several socket selectors can be connected to the virtual station.

To connect the socket selector to the virtual station, go to Integrated Controller Tool > Virtual Station > Accessories and select Choose Accessories.

To set up the socket selector, refer to the Socket Selector Product Instructions.

Configure a socket selector
  1. Go to Configurations in the home menu and select Socket selector in the left pane.

  2. Issue the configuration with a Name.

  3. Select Edit.

  4. Select Add or Remove for the correct number of socket slots. Select all the slots that are to be active (indicated in blue).

  5. Set Control to External if the socket selection is to be controlled by an external system.

Relevant Information
  • Choosing Accessories

Configuring an I/O Expander or an I/O Hub

To set up an I/O Expander, refer to the I/O Expander Product Instructions.

To set up an I/O Hub, refer to the I/O Hub Software User Guide.

Configure the I/O Signals
  1. Go to Configurations in the home menu and select I/O Expander in the left pane. Select Edit.

  2. Two lists are displayed, one for Inputs and one for Outputs.

    • To set a channel to an input, select the required channel in the Inputs list. Choose signal type in the appearing list.

    • To set a channel to an output, select the required channel in the Outputs list. Choose signal type in the appearing list.

The I/O Hub has 8 channels compared to the I/O Expander which has 16. When configuring an I/O Hub, make sure that no channel is set to both an input and an output signal at the same time. One of the corresponding input and output channels must be configured to None. Select None in the appearing dialog box. Close the appearing list of items without selecting anything.

General Virtual Station

  1. Go to Configurations in the home menu and select General Virtual Station in the left pane.

  2. Give the configuration a name and select Edit.

  3. In the Result filter for reporting field, set the switch to On for those parameters that are to be included in the results. By default, all parameters are set to On.

    The following parameters can be set in the Result filter for reporting field:

    • Loosening

    • Batch increment

    • Batch decrement

    • Reset batch

    • Bypass tightening program

    • Abort sequence

    • Reset batch sequence

  4. In the Tightening Settings, configure when to disable loosening and when to disable tightening after a tightening.

    Parameter

    Description

    Unlock tool on loosening

    Off, On OK, Always

    Disable loosening

    Off, On OK tightening, On NOK tightening, Always

    Disable tightening

    Off, On OK tightening, On NOK tightening, After every tightening

Configuring Result Presentation Settings

The Result Presentation Settings window allows a user to show the final torque without the PrT compensation value included, and PrT compensation value on the Live results.

Configure the Result Presentation Settings Window

  1. On the Home view, select the Configurations tab. Then, on the left, select General Virtual Station.

  2. In the wanted Configuration window, select Edit.
    The Edit Configuration screen appears.

  3. In the Result Presentation Settings window, set the relevant switches to ON or OFF depending on the wanted results.

    If the Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result switch is set to ON, the Live Results window displays the PrT compensation value.

    If the Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation switch is set to ON, the Live Results window displays the final torque with the PrT compensation included.

    Setting the switches in the Results Presentations Settings window to either ON or OFF has no impact unless:

    • The multistep program has a tightening step including a Prevailing Torque step monitor with the Compensation switch set to ON.

Result Presentation Settings

Here are the different configuration options in the Results Presentations Settings window.

Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: ON

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: ON

Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: ON

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: OFF

Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: OFF

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: ON

Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: OFF

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: OFF

Hover over or point at items on image to see if there is more information:
Hover over or point at items on image to see if there is more information:
Hover over or point at items on image to see if there is more information:
Hover over or point at items on image to see if there is more information:
In this Section
  • Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: ON / Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: ON
  • Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: OFF / Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: ON
  • Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: OFF / Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: OFF
  • Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: ON / Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: OFF

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: ON / Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: ON

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: ON

The Live Result window shows the Final Torque with the PrT compensation value included.

If the eHMI and ST Selector are on and configured, they show the Final Torque with the PrT compensation value included.

Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: ON

The Live Result window shows the PrT compensation value with the related compensation icon ().

If there are several compensation values, the compensation value applied to the latest available step appears.

Configuring the Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation and Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result switches does not impact:

  • The final torque value displayed with the historical results.

  • The traces based on live and historical results.

  • The values in Open Protocol messages.

  • The signals.

  • The protocol adapters.

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: OFF / Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: ON

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: OFF

The Live Result window shows the Final Torque without the PrT compensation value included. Since the Final Torque does not include the PrT compensation value, it shows in italic.

Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: ON

The Live Result window shows the PrT compensation value with the related compensation icon ().

If there are several compensation values, the compensation value applied to the latest available step appears.

Configuring the Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation and Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result switches does not impact:

  • The final torque value displayed with the historical results.

  • The traces based on live and historical results.

  • The values in Open Protocol messages.

  • The signals.

  • The protocol adapters.

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: OFF / Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: OFF

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: OFF

The Live Result window shows the Final Torque without the PrT compensation value included. Since the Final Torque does not include the PrT compensation value, it shows in italic.

Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: OFF

The Live Result window does not display the PrT compensation value and the related compensation icon ().

Configuring the Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation and Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result switches does not impact:

  • The final torque value displayed with the historical results.

  • The traces based on live and historical results.

  • The values in Open Protocol messages.

  • The signals.

  • The protocol adapters.

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: ON / Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: OFF

Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation: ON

The Live Result window shows the Final Torque with the PrT compensation value included.

If the eHMI and ST Selector are on and configured, they show the Final Torque with the PrT compensation value included.

Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result: OFF

The Live Result window does not display the PrT compensation value and the related compensation icon ().

Configuring the Show Final Torque with PrT Compensation and Show PrT Compensation Value on Live Result switches does not impact:

  • The final torque value displayed with the historical results.

  • The traces based on live and historical results.

  • The values in Open Protocol messages.

  • The signals.

  • The protocol adapters.

Working with the Integrated Controller Tool Tab

  • Virtual Station
    • Changing a License Type
    • Assigning a Task to a Virtual Station
    • Configuring Manual Mode in the Virtual Station
      • Entering and Leaving Signals
    • Open Protocol
    • Choosing Accessories
  • Tool
    • View Tool Information
    • Health
    • Maintenance
    • Tool Calibration
    • Calibrating a Tool with STa6000 or STpad
    • Motor Tuning
    • Open End Tuning
  • IAM
  • Software Versions
    • Software Activation
    • Update Software Version
  • Hardware
  • Exporting and Importing Configurations
    • Exported Information and File Format
    • Automated Backup

Virtual Station

A virtual station is a software abstraction of a controller. The IxB tool has an integrated controller with one connected virtual station. Various configurations can be assigned to the virtual station as needed. It is possible to select a task, assign accessory configurations, and set communication protocol parameters.

The selected task can either be running a tightening program, running a batch sequence or enabling the task using a source configured in the Sources menu. The task can be monitored and the result of the task can be presented together with any events that may have occurred during the operation.

In this Section
  • Changing a License Type
  • Assigning a Task to a Virtual Station
  • Configuring Manual Mode in the Virtual Station
  • Open Protocol
  • Choosing Accessories

Changing a License Type

  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Virtual Station in the left pane.

  2. Select the Virtual station type in the License field.

  3. Select a new type from the list.

  4. If applicable, select Features>Edit, to add licenses for individual features.

Assigning a Task to a Virtual Station

  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Virtual Station in the left pane. Select Choose task or Change task in the Task menu.

  2. Select one of the following tabs :

    • Tightening program: Displays a list of tightening programs available in the tool.

    • Batch: Displays a list of batch sequences available in the tool.

    • Sources: Displays a list of source tasks available in the tool.

  3. Select a task from the list.

The task name is updated in the Task field.

The task selection using sources and identifier numbers/identifier strings, is described in detail in the Sources section.

Relevant Information
  • Working with the Sources Tab

Configuring Manual Mode in the Virtual Station

Manual mode for the virtual station is used to perform tasks while the tool is in locked mode. In cases where the tool is locked for a certain reason (e.g. because the tool is outside its TLS footprint) there still may be a need to perform certain tasks with the tool, such as performing emergency work. By configuring manual mode for the virtual station, users can determine what signals are sent when entering manual mode (Entering signals), what task can be performed while in manual mode (Secondary task), and what signals are sent when leaving manual mode (Leaving signals).

Since desired scenarios can vary between different users (i.e. which signals to send upon entry and exit and what task to perform), manual mode is fully configurable for each virtual station.

Configuration consists of three elements: entering signals, leaving signals and secondary task (note that by primary task is meant the (automatic) task that is assigned to the virtual station under Task).

  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Virtual Station in the left pane. Select Set manual mode in the Task field.

  2. Select Choose task or Change task in the Secondary Task field. This determines which task that is to be run when in manual mode.

    If no secondary task is set, the primary task will be used during manual mode.

    All task types (tightening, batch sequence, source) can be set for the secondary task as for the primary task.

  3. Set the entering signals to be sent by selecting the plus icon at the bottom of the Entering section.

  4. Set the leaving signals to be sent by selecting the plus icon at the bottom of the Leaving section. See the parameters for leaving signals below.

There is a limit of 99 signals that can be set for entering and leaving.

In this Section
  • Entering and Leaving Signals

Entering and Leaving Signals

The parameters for entering and leaving signals are the same.

There are two types of signals: Boolean and integer/string type. For Boolean type signals, an on/off (true/false) switch is used. For integer/string type signals, a text field is used where the (I/O) signal or string can be indicated.

Signal

Type

Default value

Abort sequence

Boolean

Off

Acknowledge events

Boolean

Off

Activate tool scanner

Boolean

Off

Clear results

Boolean

Off

Disable Open Protocol Commands

Boolean

Off

External monitored [1-8]

Boolean

Off

Flash Tool Green Led (external protocol)

Boolean

Off

Reset all identifiers

Boolean

Off

Reset batch

Boolean

Off

Reset batch sequence

Boolean

Off

Reset bistable relay

Boolean

Off

Reset latest identifier

Boolean

Off

Reset Too Many NOK

Boolean

Off

Set bistable relay

Boolean

Off

Unlock tool on complete

Boolean

Off

Unlock tool on disable

Boolean

Off

Open Protocol

Under Protocols, in the Virtual Station menu, there is a list of available communication protocols depending on the current license in use. The Open Protocol is available for all licenses.

To gain access to functionality through Open Protocol, a unique port must be defined for the virtual station.

To define the port for Open Protocol:
  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Virtual Station in the left pane.

  2. Set the Open Protocol switch to On.

  3. Enter the Server port number.

  4. Enter the PLC Index value.

    PLC Index is used to map where in the shared memory the Open Protocol commands are to be written. The default value is 1 but it is possible to enter values 1 to 6

  5. Choose the action to be applied when the connection to the client is lost.

    The Disconnect setting controls the action applied when a connection error occurs:

    • None - The tightening program continues normally.

    • Lock tool active high - The tool is locked after finishing the current tightening normally.

    • Unassign task - The tightening is aborted after finishing the ongoing task. Except for plain tightening programs or Batch sequences where the task will be removed after finishing.

    • Always lock tool - The tool is locked after finishing the current tightening, regardless of result.

  6. Set Use legacy counter to Yes or No, depending on what i required.

    By setting the counter to Yes, the legacy counter counts all tightenings in a sequence and outputs that number to secondary systems.

  7. Select the MID2500 loosening program and select a MID2500 loosening program from the list.

  8. Select Apply.

Choosing Accessories

Adding accessories to the virtual station
  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Virtual Station in the left pane.

  2. Select Choose accessories in the Accessories field.

  3. Choose the accessory to be connected: Socket Selector, Scanner, I/O Expander or I/O Hub.

  4. In the Configuration column (left), select the configuration to be used with the accessory .

  5. In the Connected Accessories column (right), select the accessory to use.

Removing accessories from the virtual station
  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Virtual Station in the left pane.

  2. Select Choose accessories in the Accessories field.

  3. In the Assigned Accessories list, select the minus icon next to the accessory to be removed.

Tool

  • View Tool Information
  • Health
  • Maintenance
  • Tool Calibration
  • Calibrating a Tool with STa6000 or STpad
  • Motor Tuning
  • Open End Tuning

View Tool Information

  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Tool in the left pane.

  2. Expand the Tool Information field to view the following information:

    Information

    Description

    Model

    Tool model denomination.

    Max speed

    The maximum rotation speed of the tool (rpm).

    Gear ratio

    The ratio of the angular velocity of the input gear to the angular velocity of the output gear.

    Serial number

    The serial number of the tool may be needed when for the correct spare parts list or service instructions.

    Max torque

    The maximum torque the tool can use for a tightening.

    Product number

    The product number of the tool.

Health

The Health view shows information tool temperature.

The tool temperature is monitored continuously. Supported temperature units are degrees Celsius (°C) and degrees Fahrenheit (°F), with °C being the default unit. It is possible to switch between the two units without requiring a tool restart. When the tool motor temperature or tool electronics temperature exceeds max temperature, the tool is locked and an alert (2014) will be shown. The tool is once again unlocked when the tool temperature drops below the temperature limit.

Monitor the tool temperature
  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Tool in the left pane.

  2. Both tool electronics temperature and tool motor temperature are listed under Health.

  3. Select either entry to access a list of peak temperatures and their timestamps.

Maintenance

The tool stores a service interval number and counts how many tightenings that can be performed before a tool maintenance or service is needed.

Set a service interval
  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home and select Tool in the left pane.

  2. Expand the Maintenance field. The following information is displayed:

    Parameter

    Description

    Last service

    Date and time when last service was performed. The Last service date is set at the repair workshop. The Last service date is set to current date and time when the Reset service counter button is pressed.

    Total tightenings at service

    Total number of tightenings performed by the tool since it was used for the first time. This value is made available at service, and will remain the same until next service.

    Remaining tightenings

    Total number of tightenings left until the service interval is reached.

    Service interval

    Number of tightenings to be performed between two service events. Can be set in multiples of 10 000.

    Reset service counter

    Reset of the Remaining tightenings counter and sets Last service date to current date.

  3. Set a value in the Service interval field.

    The Service interval number can only be set in multiples of 10 000. Any number other than multiples of 10 000 will be rounded off to the nearest multiple of 10 000.

  4. Select OK.

To enable the maintenance alarm, go to Settings > Alarms > Maintenance and set the Service alarm indicator to On.

Tool Calibration

Tool calibration is used to control how well a tool corresponds to a reference transducer.

The calibration value stored in the tool memory is used to adjust the torque value given by the tool’s torque transducer so that the correct torque value is displayed in the user interface. The interface displays the date when the tool was last calibrated.

Preparing the Calibration

Make sure the tool is set up to perform tightening. Set up the tool with a torque reference transducer such as an STa6000, STpad or JSB Bench. Refer to the torque reference transducer’s user guide for set-up instructions.

Choose a tightening program with a target torque corresponding to a tightening normally used with your tool.

The calibration value to use for the tool is calculated from the torque readings from the tool and the torque reference transducer by using the equation below:

Calibrate the tool
  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Virtual Station > Tool > Calibration

  2. Note the old calibration value found in the Calibration value: Main text box.

  3. Make at least three tightenings and use the torque values read from the tool and the reference transducer (ACTA or similar) for calculating the mean torque values.

  4. Calculate the new calibration value using the New calibration value equation.

  5. If applicable, type a new date in the Next calibration date field.

  6. Store the new calibration value in the tool memory by entering the calculated value in the Calibration value: Main text box and select Apply.

After calibration is completed, perform a tightening to verify that the new values are correct.

To enable the calibration alarm, go to Settings > Alarms > Calibration and set the Calibration alarm to On.

Calibrating a Tool with STa6000 or STpad

Performing the QA Calibration through the STa6000 or STpad

  1. Go to the Integrated Controller Tool menu and select Tool > QA Calibration.

  2. Set the QA Calibration to On.

  3. Select the connection type to be used (TCP or COM), and type the port number.

    The default port for communication is 4561.

  4. Start the calibration from the STa6000/STpad. The STa6000/STpad requests tool information and tightening program.

    Single tightening programs cannot be used for calibration purposes. Make sure a batch program is selected.

  5. Execute the tightening. When the calibration device detects a tightening, it requests the tightening result from the tool.

  6. Repeat the above step until all tightenings in the batch have been executed.

    Once completed, the STa6000/STpad creates a report, as well as calculate a new calibration value for the tool.

  7. Select Store in the STa6000/STpad to send the new calibration value to the tool.

During calibration, if the tightening program is changed, or the sequence/batch is updated, the calibration is terminated.

There is no limit in the batch size used for calibration purposes. However, the STa6000 can only display two digits as batch size. Thus, the counter on the Sta6000 reads 00 for 100.

After calibration is completed, perform a tightening to verify that the new values are correct.

Motor Tuning

A motor tuning adjusts the tool’s motor control unit to optimize the performance and minimize loss.

The motor tuning will take approximately two minutes to perform and will rotate the spindle in both clockwise (CC) and counterclockwise (CCW) directions before it is finished.

For tools configured with open end Gear Front Attachment (GFA):

  • Remove the open end extension from the tool before performing the motor tuning.

Perform motor tuning
  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Tool > Motor Tuning.

  2. Select Perform and then press the trigger on the tool.

  3. Follow the instructions on the screen and keep pressing the tool trigger until the motor tuning is done.

    • If the motor tuning was successful an OK event will be displayed.

    • If the motor tuning was not successful, or the tool trigger was released before the motor tuning was finished, an NOK event will be displayed.

Open End Tuning

The open end tuning function is available for tools configured with open end Gear Front Attachment (GFA). The function calculates the true gear ratio of both the tool and the extension combined, and saves it to the tool. The tuning will take approximately two minutes to perform.

When the open end tuning is completed the tool must be calibrated with the open end extension attached.

Perform open end tuning
  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Tool > Open End Tuning.

  2. Select Perform and then press the trigger on the tool.

  3. Follow the instructions on the screen and keep pressing the tool trigger until the open end tuning is completed.

    • If the open end tuning was successful an OK event will be displayed.

    • If the open end tuning was not successful, or the tool trigger was released before the tuning was finished, an NOK event will be displayed.

IAM

The Intelligent Application Module (IAM) is a non-volatile storage that is located in the tool. The storage module contains all the tool programs, configurations and results.

Give the tool a name
  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select IAM.

  2. Apply a Name to the tool.

Software Versions

Two software versions can be installed in the tool simultaneously. Installing a second version of the software is useful when performing upgrades on multiple tools. When production is ready for switching to the upgraded software, activation of the new software version is done from the IxB Software user interface, or with ToolsTalk 2.

Changing software versions does not transfer the tool configurations or tightening programs.

In this Section
  • Software Activation
  • Update Software Version

Software Activation

The tool can store two installed software versions. By using the Software activation, it is possible to choose which software version to use.

Make sure to keep the battery connected to the tool throughout the procedure.

Activate a software version
  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu and select Software in the left pane.

  2. Select Current or Stored in the Software Activation window.

The tool is automatically restarted for the activation to take effect.

Update Software Version

Make sure to keep the battery connected to the tool throughout the procedure.

  1. Go to the Integrated Controller Tool menu and select Software in the left pane.

  2. Go to the Software Update field and select BROWSE.

  3. Browse and choose the zip file with the applicable software and follow the instructions to finish installation.

Hardware

View hardware information of the tool
  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu. Select Hardware in the left pane.

  2. Select Main Board or Power Module to view Serial number, Article number and Hardware revision of the hardware module.

Exporting and Importing Configurations

The export and import functions are used to export events and tightening results for analysis in external programs, as well as allowing for transferring of tightening programs, batches, and tool configurations between tools.

The export function is used to:

  • Export tightening results and events for further processing.

  • Export log files for debug assistance from an Atlas Copco service engineer.

  • Export tool configuration that can be used to copy settings to another tool.

Export a configuration
  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu. Select Export/Import in the left pane.

  2. Select what to export from the tool: All information or Settings and configurations.

    When Settings and configurations is chosen no file with results or events will be exported into the archive. With this setting the export takes less time to perform.

  3. Select EXPORT. A prompt to select where to save or retrieve the exported file is shown.

Import a configuration
  1. Go to Integrated Controller Tool in the home menu. Select Export/Import in the left pane.

  2. Select IMPORT. When using the import function, all settings for tightening program, batch, accessories, and tool are replaced by the settings from the import file. However, settings for network, PIN, and results and events are not imported.

  3. Select CONTINUE in the dialog box to start the import.

In this Section
  • Exported Information and File Format
  • Automated Backup

Exported Information and File Format

The exported file is a compressed file archive containing the following files:

All information

  • IXBExport_<datetime>_Results.csv

  • IXBExport_<datetime>_Events.csv

  • ExportInfo.txt

  • settings/settings.bin

  • atlas_tool_i.zip

  • atlas_sys_i.zip

  • atlas_subsystems_info.zip

  • atlas_plc.zip

  • jsonConfigurations.zip

Settings and configurations

  • ExportInfo.txt

  • settings/settings.bin

  • jsonConfigurations.zip

Exported information

File

Description

IXBExport__<Tool name>_<Time stamp>_Events.csv

A semicolon-separated file containing the following information:

  • Severity: Type of event

  • Date and time: A time stamp of when the event occurred

  • Code: The event ID

  • Description: A short description of the event

  • Virtual station: Virtual station ID

IXBExport__<Tool name>_<Time stamp>_Results.csv

A semicolon-separated file containing the following information:

  • Type of tightening: Multi tool, single tool, single tool batch, or multi tool batch.

  • Virtual station name

  • Unique tool identifier

  • VIN: Vehicle Identification Number

  • Date and time: A time stamp of when the result occurred

  • Batch sequence name: The batch sequence name

  • Batch sequence counter: The batch number in the batch sequence

  • Batch count: Actual tightening in the batch

  • Bolt name

  • Status: Tightening or loosening status OK or NOK

  • Status additional info: A short description of the result status

  • Tightening program/multistep name

  • Stopping error

  • Errors

  • Failing step

  • Target torque: The target torque value

  • Final torque: The final torque value

  • Target angle: The target angle value

  • Final angle: The final angle value

  • Rundown angle: The rundown angle value

  • Residual torque correlation factor [%]: Factor to compensate for the difference between residual torque and dynamic torque when using TurboTight.

  • Elapsed time [s]

  • Angle low limit [deg]

  • Torque low limit [Nm]

  • Torque high limit [Nm]

  • Number of pulses

  • Current at shutoff [A]

  • TrueAngle compensation [deg]

  • Time to rundown complete [ms]

  • Time to final torque [ms]

  • target text

ExportInfo.txt

Information about the tool set-up and tool software.

settings/settings.bin

A binary file containing all tightening programs and Batch settings, Accessory configurations, and tool settings such as: Language, Torque units, Date and time, and Result appearance.

atlas_tool_i.zip

Tool logs (for debugging)

atlas_sys_i.zip

Logfiles from IT application

atlas_subsystems_info.zip

Info about subsystem software

atlas_plc.zip

PLC configuration

jsonConfigurations.zip

Multistep Tightening and Loosening programs

Depending on the language setting in the IxB Software, the exported .csv file uses different characters to separate the fields. Depending on the language setting in the computer, formatting problems may occur when opening the exported .csv file. To avoid problems, always match the language used in the tool with the language of the computer.

See the following table for language formatting details of the IxB Software:

Formats in different languages

Language

Date/time

Field delimiter

Number format

English (en_US)

MM/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss

,

123.456

Czech (cs_CZ)

dd.MM.yyyy hh:mm:ss

;

123,456

German (de_DE)

dd.MM.yyyy hh:mm:ss

;

123,456

Spanish (es_ES)

dd/MM//yyyy hh:mm:ss

;

123,456

French (fr_FR)

dd/MM/yyyy hh:mm:ss

;

123,456

Korean (ko_KR)

yyyy-MM-dd hh:mm:ss

,

123.456

Italian (it_IT)

dd/MM/yyyy hh:mm:ss

;

123,456

Japanese (ja_JP)

yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss

,

123.456

Portugese (pt_BR)

dd/MM/yyyy hh:mm:ss

;

123,456

Russian (ru_RU)

dd.MM.yyyy hh:mm:ss

;

123,456

Swedish (sv_SE)

yyyy-MM-dd hh:mm:ss

;

123,456

Chinese (zh_CN)

yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss

,

123.456

Automated Backup

The Automated Backup window enables or disables sFTP export.

By default, Enable sFTP export switch is set to OFF.
When turning ON Enable sFTP export switch, an export file is created 10 minutes after the last configuration change.
If Enable sFTP export switch is set to ON on system startup, an export file is automatically created within 2-3 minutes. The export file is created within 2-3 minutes to reflect changes that might have been done before the system was shutdown.

The old Backup file is deleted before the new Backup file is available.

The data in the exported file include all configurations and settings of the controller.

The sFTP users can retrieve the exported file stored in the following directory of the system: /Export/<export file name>.

A system supporting sFTP is needed.

To retrieve the file sFTP users do not need to use any password.

The username for sFTP users is as follows:

Username

autoexport

Working with the Settings Tab

  • Network Configurations
    • Configuring Channels
    • Configuring a Wireless Client
    • Configuring the Tool as a Wireless Access Point
  • Server Connections
    • Configuring the ToolsTalk Connection
    • Configuring the ToolsNet Connection
    • Configuring the License Manager Connection
  • Preferences
  • Configuring the PIN Settings
  • Configuring Alarms
  • Configuring Events
  • Performing Factory Reset and Clearing Results

Network Configurations

The tool can be set up to be accessed wirelessly from a web browser on a Local Area Network (LAN), using IPv4 protocol.

There is an option to use the tool as a client or an access point for other devices

Preparations
  1. Remove the cover of the tool's USB connection port.

  2. Connect the tool to the USB-port of the PC.

  3. Open a web browser and type in the address of the IxB Software user interface: 169.254.1.1.

In this Section
  • Configuring Channels
  • Configuring a Wireless Client
  • Configuring the Tool as a Wireless Access Point

Configuring Channels

  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select Network in the left pane.

  2. In the Channels field, choose frequency (2.4 GHz or 5 GHz) and select Edit.

  3. Choose to enable or disable channels.

Configuring a Wireless Client

  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select Network in the left pane.

  2. In the Wireless Client field, select Edit.

  3. Set Enabled to On.

  4. Set DHCP to On or Off depending on the configuration. If set to Off, fill out the required information, provided by the local system administrator:

    • IP address

    • Subnet mask

    • Gateway

  5. Enter a Network name (SSID).

  6. In the Security field, select Mode and choose a security mode from the list. If WPA2 Personal is chosen, enter a Security key.

  7. Enter security parameters and import cert files and keys, as applicable.

  8. Edit the Optional Settings as applicable.

  9. Select Apply.

    The tool will establish a wireless connection to the network, indicated with the tool's blue connection LED indicator emitting a steady light.

  10. To access the user interface wirelessly, type the IP address into a web browser.

Configuring the Tool as a Wireless Access Point

If multiple channels have been configured previously in Wireless Client mode, enabling Wireless AP mode will update the channel list to contain only the current/default channel for the Wireless AP mode.

  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select Network in the left pane.

  2. In the Wireless AP field, select Edit.

  3. Set Enabled to On.

  4. Enter the required information, provided by the local system administrator:

    • IP address

    • Subnet mask

    • Gateway

  5. To distribute IP addresses, set DHCP Server to On and enter IP range start and IP range stop.

  6. Enter a Network name (SSID).

  7. In the Security field, select Mode and choose a security mode from the list. If WPA2 Personal is chosen, enter a Security key.

  8. Select Apply.

Server Connections

The tool can be set up to communicate with servers running the following Atlas Copco software products:

  • ToolsTalk − used to configure one or several controllers and IxB tools

  • ToolsNet − used to handle result reporting

  • Atlas Copco License Manager

In this Section
  • Configuring the ToolsTalk Connection
  • Configuring the ToolsNet Connection
  • Configuring the License Manager Connection

Configuring the ToolsTalk Connection

  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select Server Connections in the left pane.

  2. In the ToolsTalk field, set the following parameters:

    Field

    Description

    On/Off

    Enables/Disables communication with the ToolsTalk server

    Server port

    ToolsTalk server port

    Server host

    ToolsTalk server IP address

  3. Select Apply.

To view the ToolsTalk connection status, go to Reports > Results and select the button. In the appearing dialog box, select the Server connections tab.

For information on how to configure ToolsTalk, refer to the ToolsTalk 2 User Guide.

Relevant Information
  • Viewing Protocol Status

Configuring the ToolsNet Connection

  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select Server Connections in the left pane.

  2. In the ToolsNet field, set the following parameters:

    Field

    Description

    On/Off

    Enables/Disables communication with the ToolsNet server

    Server port

    ToolsNet server port

    Server host

    ToolsNet server IP address

  3. Select Apply.

To view the ToolsNet connection status, go to Reports > Results and select the button. In the appearing dialog box, select the Server connections tab.

For information on how to configure ToolsNet, refer to the ToolsNet 8 User Guide.

Relevant Information
  • Viewing Protocol Status

Configuring the License Manager Connection

  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select Server Connections in the left pane.

  2. In the Atlas Copco License Manager field, set the following parameters:

    Field

    Description

    On/Off

    Enables/Disables communication with the Atlas Copco license manager server

    Server port

    Atlas Copco license manager server port

    Server host

    Atlas Copco license manager server IP address

  3. Select APPLY.

Preferences

Date and Time

Date and time must be set in order for events and results to get the correct time stamp for when they occurred. The time is retrieved from one of three available sources:

  • Manual − the date, time, and time zone are set manually.

  • NTP − the date and time are retrieved from an NTP (Network Time Protocol) server defined in the user interface.

  • ToolsNet − the date and time are retrieved from the ToolsNet server.

Set the date and time
  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select Preferences in the left pane.

  2. In the Date and Time field, set the following parameters:

    Parameter

    Description

    Source

    Source to retrieve the time from.

    NTP Server 1

    IP-address of an NTP server providing date and time for the tool.

    Server 1 status

    OK/No Status

    NTP Server 2

    IP-address of an NTP server providing date and time for the tool.

    Server 2 status

    OK/No Status

    Date

    Date entered manually if the source is set to manual.

    Time

    Time entered manually if the source is set to manual.

    Time zone

    The time zone; either the location or a standard time zone such as UTC (coordinated universal time)

  3. Select APPLY.

Setting Language

The user interface is available in the following twelve languages:

  • English

  • Czech

  • German

  • Spanish

  • French

  • Korean

  • Italian

  • Japanese

  • Portuguese

  • Russian

  • Swedish

  • Chinese

Change the language
  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select Preferences in the left pane.

  2. In the Language field, select the language currently in use and choose a language from the list.

The language change will take effect immediately.

Setting the Torque Unit

Torque results are displayed in the chosen unit both after a tightening is performed and when stored in the results list.

Available torque units

Unit

Description

cNm

centinewton metre

dNm

decinewton metre

Nm

newton metre

kNm

kilonewton metre

in·lbf

inch-pound force

ft·lbf

foot-pound force

in·ozf

inch ounce-force

ft·ozf

foot ounce-force

gf·cm

gram-force centimetre

kgf·cm

kilogram-force centimetre

kgf·m

kilogram-force metre

Change the torque unit
  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select Preferences in the left pane.

  2. In the Torque Units field, select the unit currently in use and choose a unit from the list.

The torque unit change will take effect immediately.

Setting the Temperature Unit

Change the temperature unit
  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select Preferences in the left pane.

  2. In the Temperature Units field, select the unit currently in use and choose C° or F° from the list.

Setting the Startup Screen

The default screen at startup of the tool is the Home screen. It is possible to change startup screen to the Result screen. A change of startup screen in the settings requires a restart of the tool or a refresh of the user interface.

Change the startup screen
  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select Preferences in the left pane.

  2. In the Startup Screen field, select the startup screen currently in use and then select Home screen or Result Screen from the list.

Configuring the PIN Settings

Using a PIN code prevents unauthorized usage of the tool or accidental changes. Multiple users can be added to the tool, each with its own PIN. Note that PIN codes are not linked to tool configurations but are used mainly for logging reasons.

The PIN must be a four-digit number in the range 0000–9999. When PIN is enabled, and the configured inactivity time has been reached, the tool configuration cannot edited. A maximum of 10 users can be added to the tool.

When changes are made to the PIN, the user that made the changes is logged. This will be displayed in the column Changed by, and added to the change history.

When PIN is activated a PIN code is required when accessing the tool from the web user interface. Without the correct PIN being entered, the user interface will only be readable, but not editable.

Activate the PIN
  1. Go to the Settings in the home menu and select PIN in the left pane. Select Configure.

  2. Set the PIN code switch to On.

    The PIN can only be activated when at least one user in the list is enabled. If no user is enabled, a warning will appear.

  3. Fill out the Inactivity timeout (in seconds) to set when the tool will be locked in case of inactivity.

    The default value for Inactivity timeout is 120 seconds. Note that this is a global setting, and cannot be set on a per user basis.

Add a new user
  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select PIN in the left pane. Select Configure.

  2. Select the plus icon in the top right.

  3. Select the Name field to edit the entry.

  4. In the User window, enter a Name .

  5. Enter PIN and Confirm PIN for the user. The PIN must be a four-digit number in the range 0000–9999.

    The PIN in both fields (Enter PIN and Confirm PIN) must match for the changes to be applied.

  6. Select Permissions. The list of the available configurations appears.
    Select the check box at the left of the necessary configuration(s) the user can access and make changes.
    After selecting the necessary configuration(s), select OK.
    The User window appears.

    Select all selects all the available configurations at the same time.
    Select Deselect all to clear the check boxes and undo the selection.

    The user can access and make changes only to the configuration(s) selected in the Permissions window, and browse the unselected configurations with read-only access. For the unselected configurations, no changes are allowed.

  7. Select Apply.

  8. In the list of users, select the check box to the left of the user name to enable the user.

    When PIN is enabled, the tool locks automatically after the configured Inactivity timeout.

    To disable a PIN/user, clear the check box to the left of the user name.

Enable or disable users
  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select PIN in the left pane. Select Configure.

  2. In the Users field, select the check box to the left of the user name to enable the user.

    When the PIN is enabled, the tool locks automatically after the configured Inactivity timeout.

    To disable a PIN/user, clear the check box to the left of the user.

Note that PINs can also be enabled and disabled by selecting the user name and setting the Enabled switch to On or Off, respectively.

Delete a user
  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select PIN in the left pane. Select Configure.

  2. In the Users field, select the red minus icon to the right of the user name.

Sign in with a PIN
  1. Select the padlock icon in the top right corner.

  2. A dialog box with a key pad appears. Enter the PIN code and select OK.

    When the PIN is enabled and the screen has been unlocked, an Open Padlock icon appears in the top right corner of the user interface.

    The user interface can be locked again manually, by selecting the Open Padlock icon.

Configuring Alarms

Alarms are set to control when to perform maintenance or calibration of the tool.

The tool service interval, calibration details, and other relevant information is found in the Integrated Controller Tool > Tool menu.

Set a maintenance alarm
  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select Alarms in the left pane.

  2. In the Maintenance field, set the following parameters:

    Parameter

    Description

    Service indicator alarm

    On/Off: Enables/Disables an alarm for when the service interval of the tool is reached.

    Tool lock after alarm

    On/Off: Enables/Disables a lock of the tool when the service interval is reached.

To set a calibration alarm:
  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select Alarms in the left pane.

  2. In the Calibration field, set the Calibration alarm to On/Off to enable/disable it.

Configuring Events

Each event has a default setting for whether it is to be acknowledged (ACK), logged (LOG), or displayed (DISP).

Some options cannot be changed. They are greyed out.

Configure events
  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select Events in the left pane.

  2. Select Configure events.

  3. Search for the event to be configured by typing the event code in the Search field and pressing Enter.

  4. Tick or untick the boxes ACK., LOG. and DISP., as desired.

  5. If applicable, add information about the event in the DETAILS field.

Performing Factory Reset and Clearing Results

The tool can be reverted back to its original factory settings.

All settings, configurations and historical data will be deleted when the tool is reset. Only perform a factory reset when you are completely sure that this course of action is required.

Perform a factory reset of the tool
  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select Reset in the left pane.

  2. In the Factory Reset Controller field, select the Reset button.

  3. A dialog box will appear warning that all data will be deleted. Select Yes.

    The tool will perform a reboot to activate the new settings.

Clear results
  1. Go to Settings in the home menu and select Reset in the left pane.

  2. In the Clear Results field, select the Clear button.

  3. A dialog box will appear warning that all results and events will be deleted. Select Yes.

The tool will perform a reboot to clear the data.

Reports and Statistics

In this section, you can learn about available reports and statistics.

In this Section
  • Working with the Reports Tab

Working with the Reports Tab

  • Viewing Results
    • Live Results View
    • Stored Results View
      • Viewing Synchronized Traces
    • NOK Results List
    • Viewing Protocol Status
  • Viewing Events
    • The Event Dialog Box
    • Event Codes
  • Viewing NOK Ratio
  • SPC - Statistical Process Control
    • Configuring SPC Parameters
    • Configuring SPC Variables
    • Calculating Statistics
    • Viewing Statistics Results

Viewing Results

This section describes how to access tightening results from the tool, and how to read the information given in the different result views.

When a tightening is performed, the result is stored in the tool. Results can also be sent to an external system such as ToolsNet, or exported for analysis using the export function. For more information about statistical analysis, result filtering and tightening analysis using ToolsNet, refer to the ToolsNet User Guide.

Live Results and Stored Results

The live result dialog box shows results from the tool on the screen as it occurs. Tightening results are also automatically stored in the tool as soon as the tightening is finished.

Each task is displayed as one result. A single tightening can show results in a table with key parameters or as a tightening graph. A batch sequence shows all the individual tightenings in the order in which they were performed.

In this Section
  • Live Results View
  • Stored Results View
  • NOK Results List
  • Viewing Protocol Status

Live Results View

Position

Description

1

Target torque

2

Tightening result

3

Tightening result

4

Target angle

5

Result status

6

An NOK tightening will give a detailed status of the unsuccessful tightening.

7

Number of completed batches in the sequence

8

Batch sequence name

9

Total number of batches in the sequence

10

Result of each completed batch in the sequence:

  • An ongoing batch is colored white

  • An OK batch is colored gray, with the number boxed.

  • A NOK batch is colored red, with the number boxed and crossed out.

11

Number of completed tightenings in the batch

12

Tightening program name

13

Total number of tightenings in the batch

14

Number of completed tightenings in the batch:

  • An OK tightening is colored gray, with the number circled.

  • A NOK tightening is colored red, with the number circled and crossed out.

Stored Results View

The tool stores the result for every tightening or loosening performed.

View stored results
  1. Go to Reports in the home menu and select Results in the left pane.

  2. Select View all results. The result list will show information about:

    • Date: date and time of the tightening performed.

    • Tightening Program: Tightening Program column shows Multistep Tightening Program name, or Batch Sequence name followed by the Tightening Program name within the Batch Sequence.

    • Result: Torque / Angle result.

    • Limits: Limits column shows only when the user sets Step Monitor or Step Restriction (Step level), or Program Monitor or Program Restrictions (Multistep Program level).

      Step Monitors, Step Restrictions, Program Monitors and Program Restrictions are applicable for Final Torque and Final Angle.

    • Details: Tightening / loosening result details.

    • Trace checkbox: By selecting a trace checkbox the corresponding result will be shown in the Sync Trace Result View.

    Results marked with a red bar have status NOK. For descriptions of NOK results, see the NOK Result List.

  3. Select a result in the list to enter the Trace Result View.
    The Trace Result View window shows, step by step, the tightening life-cycle.
    When the tightening is NOK, the Trace Result View shows which Step Monitor or Step Restriction that caused it.

On the upper-right corner of the trace graph, select the left-arrow / right-arrow to show the necessary trace graph.
The following trace graphs are available:

  • Torque / Time

  • Torque / Angle

  • Angle / Time

  • Speed / Time

  • Speed / Angle

  • Gradient / Time (when the tightening program is configured to make a gradient trace)

  • Gradient / Angle (when the tightening program is configured to make a gradient trace)

  • Current / Time

  • Current / Angle

On the trace graph, it is possible to zoom in/out, move the trace, and read x-axis and y-axis values on a specific point.
On the lower-left corner of the trace graph, select "+" to zoom in , "-" to zoom out, or the "square icon" to reset the zoom level back to the default view.

On the lower part of the Trace Result View window, detailed step information is shown.

In this Section
  • Viewing Synchronized Traces

Viewing Synchronized Traces

Synchronizing traces older than software version 3.5 is not supported.

Synchronize and compare traces
  1. Go to Reports in the home menu and select Results in the left pane.

  2. Select View all results.

  3. Select the traces to compare by marking the icon of the corresponding results. A selected trace icon turns blue.

    Up to 10 traces can be selected.

    Results without the icon do not support synchronization.

  4. Select the icon in the upper right hand corner, to open the sync trace view. When selecting the icon all selected result traces will be unchecked.

  5. In the Sync Trace Result View, select the preferred Sync method from the drop-down list.

    Select the trace types with the arrows in the upper right hand corner.

The Sync Trace Result View is shown below:

Hover over or point at items on image to see if there is more information:

1

Select method to synchronize traces and display of current sync method.

2

Zoom methods to examine sections of the traces in more detail. Select "+" to zoom in , "-" to zoom out, or the "square icon" to reset the zoom level back to the default view.

It is also possible to zoom to a specific section by holding down the right mouse button, moving the mouse over a section, and release the right mouse button. The area inside the drawn rectangle defines the area to show.

3

Each result is represented by one tab, showing the time when the tightening was performed. An icon on the left of each tab reflects the outcome of the tightening:

  • Blue: Tightening successful

  • Red: Tightening failed

  • Exclamation mark: The trace cannot be shown in the diagram

Clicking on the icon toggles between the following display settings for its trace:

  • Show trace only

  • Show trace and step dividers with available limits or restrictions

  • Hide trace

4

Change primary result trace.

The primary result trace is used as reference and will define the values for the x-axis. Only one trace can be set as primary result. The first selected trace (the left-most tab) is by default used as reference.

5

Tightening details of currently selected result.

6

Switch between available trace types. The following trace graphs are available:

  • Torque / Time

  • Torque / Angle

  • Angle / Time

  • Speed / Time

  • Speed / Angle

  • Gradient / Time (when the related Step Monitor is set)

  • Gradient / Angle (when the related Step Monitor is set)

  • Current / Time

  • Current / Angle

Sync Methods

Sync methods are different strategies to synchronize traces by a specific value.

Traces can be synchronized by, for example, peak torque (highest torque reached for each trace). This shifts all traces along the x-axis, until each curve has its peak torque value at the exact same position on the x-axis.

All subsequent results are given an offset on the x-axis according to one of the following methods:

Sync method

Description

None

Default value. Selected traces are not synced.

Peak / Torque
Peak / Angle
Peak / Speed
Peak / Current
Peak / Gradient

All traces are synchronized towards the peak value, that is, shifted along the x-axis so that the peak values are at the same position on the x-axis as the peak value of the primary result.

Custom / Torque
Custom / Angle
Custom / Speed
Custom / Current
Custom / Gradient

  • All traces are synchronized towards a set value, shifted along the x-axis so that the set value are the same at the same position The set value of the primary result is used as reference point on the x-axis.

If sync method Custom is selected and none of the traces contains the configured value, an exclamation mark is shown in the custom value field.

If a result has no trace value that matches to the sync method it cannot be synchronized and its trace will not be shown. It will instead be shown with an exclamation mark.

If none of the traces are possible to synchronize, the error message “Unable to synchronize” is shown.

NOK Results List

Error message

Description

Required step category

Reporting step monitors

Reporting step restrictions

Reporting program monitors

Reporting program restrictions

Drive error

Internal drive error or battery removed during tightening

Rehit

Attempt to tighten an already tightened bolt.

Rehit

Soft start torque below min

Soft start torque below minimum level.

SoftStart

Peak Torque
Post Thread Cut
Peak Torque Shut Off Torque
Torque in Angle Window

Torque in Angle Window

Soft start torque above max

Soft start torque exceeded maximum level.

SoftStart

Peak Torque
Post Thread Cut Peak Torque
Shut Off Torque
Torque in Angle Window

Maximum Torque
Torque in Angle Window

Maximum Torque Limit

Rundown torque above max

Rundown torque exceeded maximum level.

Rundown

Peak Torque
Prevailing Torque
Post Thread Cut Peak Torque
Shut Off Torque
Torque in Angle Window

Maximum Torque
Torque in Angle Window

Maximum Torque Limit

Rundown angle above max

Rundown angle exceeded maximum level.

Rundown

Angle
Post Thread Cut Angle

Maximum Angle

Rundown exceeding max time limit

Rundown time exceeded maximum limit.

Rundown

Time

Maximum Time

Rundown below min time limit

Rundown time below minimum limit

Rundown

Time

Rundown torque below min

Rundown torque below minimum level.

Rundown

Peak Torque
Prevailing Torque
Post Thread Cut Peak Torque
Shut Off Torque
Torque in Angle Window

Torque in Angle Window

Rundown angle below min

Rundown angle below minimum level

Rundown

Angle
Post Thread Cut Angle

Final step torque above max

Final step torque exceeded maximum level.

Final

Peak Torque
Post Thread Cut Peak Torque
Shut Off Torque
Torque in Angle Window

Maximum Torque
Torque in Angle Window

Torque

Maximum Torque Limit

Final step angle above max

Final step angle exceeded maximum level.

Final

Angle
Post Thread Cut Angle

Maximum Angle

Angle

Final step torque below min

Final step torque below minimum level.

Final

Peak Torque
Post Thread Cut Peak Torque
Shut Off Torque
Torque in Angle Window

Torque in Angle Window

Torque

Final step angle below min

Final step angle below minimum level.

Final

Angle
Post Thread Cut Angle

Angle

Tightening timeout

Tightening time limit exceeded.

Maximum Time Limit

Trigger lost

Tool trigger was released before target was reached.

Slip off

Socket has slipped off the nut.

Rescinding Torque

Post view torque below min

Post view torque below minimum level.

Post View Torque Low

Post view torque above max

Post view torque exceeded maximum level.

Post View Torque High

Post view torque interval not reached

Post view torque interval not reached.

Post View Torque Low
Post View Torque High

Torque compensation interval not reached

Torque compensation interval angle before rundown end not reached

Prevailing Torque

Current monitoring error

Torque vs current deviation exceeds maximum level.

Torque vs Current Deviation

Soft start angle above max

Soft start angle exceeded maximum level.

SoftStart

Angle
Post Thread Cut Angle

Maximum Angle

Soft start angle below min

Soft start angle below minimum level

SoftStart

Angle
Post Thread Cut Angle

First step angle high

First step angle exceeded maximum level

First

Angle
Post Thread Cut Angle

Maximum Angle

First step angle low

First step angle below minimum level

First

Angle
Post Thread Cut Angle

First step torque high

First step torque exceeded maximum level

First

Peak Torque
Post Thread Cut Peak Torque
Shut Off Torque
Torque in Angle Window

Maximum Torque
Torque in Angle Window

Maximum Torque Limit

First step torque below min

First step torque below minimum level

First

Peak Torque
Post Thread Cut Peak Torque
Shut Off Torque
Torque in Angle Window

Torque in Angle Window

First step exceeded max time limit

First step time exceeded maximum level

First

Time

Maximum Time

First step below min time limit

First step time below minimum level

First

Time

Final step exceeded max time limit

Final step time exceeded maximum level

Final

Time

Maximum Time

Final step below min time limit

Final step time below minimum level

Final

Time

Soft start exceeded max time limit

Soft start time exceeded maximumlevel

SoftStart

Time

Maximum Time

Current at shut off exceeds max limit

Measured shutoff current exceeding max limit

Shut off current

Current at shut off below min limit

Measured shutoff current below min limit

Shut off current

Viewing Protocol Status

  1. Go to Reports in the home menu and select Results in the left pane.

  2. Select the button in the upper right corner. The Protocol Status dialog box appears.

  3. The tabs in the dialog box show the following information:

    Tab

    Description

    Open Protocol

    Shows the status of the open protocol connection: OK / NOK

    Server Connections

    Shows the status of the connections to ToolsTalk and ToolsNet servers: OK / NOK

    To change the configuration setting Enabled / Disabled, go to Settings > Server Connections and select the server to configure.

    Launcher Status

    Shows the launcher status of the different system adapters: OK / NOK

  4. Select Close.

Relevant Information
  • Configuring the ToolsNet Connection
  • Configuring the ToolsTalk Connection

Viewing Events

Events are used to notify the user of certain state changes or occurrences in the system. They are divided into three types; Information, Warnings and Errors and require different kinds of actions.

Each event has a default setting for whether it should be acknowledged (Ack), logged (Log) or displayed (Disp). These settings can be configured in in the Settings menu under Events.

View stored events
  1. Go to Reports in the home menu and select Results in the left pane.

  2. Select View all events.

  3. Select an event in the list to open the event dialog box.

Relevant Information
  • Configuring Events
In this Section
  • The Event Dialog Box
  • Event Codes

The Event Dialog Box

The event dialog box contains information about the occurred event describing what has happened, where and when.

Position

Description

1

Heading - Describes what part of the system the event concerns.

2

Event name - A short descriptive text of the event.

3

Code - A unique four-digit number that identifies the event.

4

Module - Describes in what part of the system the event concerns.

5

Type - Information, Warning or Error.

6

Time - Date and time when the event occurred.

Event Codes

Events are used to notify the user of certain state changes or occurrences in the system. They are of different types and require different kinds of actions.

Some of the procedures described can only be performed by an Atlas Copco authorized service provider.

Event Code Groups

The event codes can be divided into the following groups:

Event code

Group

Description

1000-1999

Controller, Tool

Controller and Tool events.

2000-2999

Tool

Tool events.

3000-3999

Controller, Drive, Channel, Configuration

Controller and Drive events, and Step sync events.

4000-4999

Process

Tightening process events.

5000-5999

Configuration

Program configuration events.

6000-6999

Accessory

Accessory events.

7000-7999

Message

Messages.

Event Code List Description

The following table describes the information in the event code list:

Item

Description

Event code

The unique event number.

Type

Type of event:

  • Info

  • Warning

  • Error

Name

A descriptive name of the event.

Description

A short description of the event and why it occurred.

Procedure

If applicable the procedure contains an instruction on how to clear the event.

A

Acknowledge: Tells the user whether the event has to be acknowledged or not before you can proceed. The value in this list is the default value.

L

Log: Tells the user whether the event is to be saved in the event log or not. The value in this list is the default value.

D

Display: Tells the user whether the event is to be displayed on the screen or not. The value in this list is the default value.

Event Code List

Event

Description

Procedure

Log

Display

Ack

Code

Type

Name

1000

Info

Controller started

The controller is started.

N/A

X

 

 

1001

Warning

Controller serial number updated

Generated at start-up if IT-board box serial number (controller serial number) differs from AUX-board box serial number. AUX-board is considered to be non-replaceable in field. The controller will reboot when the serial number is updated.

Replace IT-board or box.

X

X

X

1010

Info

Tool connected

A tool is connected.

N/A

X

X

 

1011

Info

Tool disconnected

A tool is disconnected.

N/A

X

X

 

1012

Info

Tool connection rejected

OpenProtocol tool rejected controller connection.

Check if another controller is connected to the tool.

X

X

 

2000

Warning

Battery low

 

Replace battery.

X

X

 

2001

Warning

Battery empty

 

Replace battery.

X

X

 

2002

Warning

Tool battery health low

Tool battery health problem is detected.

Replace battery

X

X

2004

Warning

Tool is not of the preferred type

Tool has been replaced by a tool with a different Tool max torque.

Change tool

 

 

2006

Warning

Tool backup battery health low

The backup battery in the tool has too poor performance.

The backup battery should be replaced.

X

 

X

2007

Warning

Tool backup battery missing

Tool backup battery is missing.

Insert battery

X

X

2008

Warning

Tool backup battery error

Tool backup battery error detected.

Replace battery

X

X

2009

Warning

Backup battery voltage low

The controller's backup battery is almost empty

Replace battery

X

X

2010

Error

Tool software version mismatch

Tool and controller software versions not compatible.

Service tool - update tool software.

X

X

X

2012

Warning

Tool communication disturbance

Communication between tool and controller interrupted.

Relocate antenna placement.

X

 

 

2013

Warning

Illegal ring position

Tool direction switch in faulty position.

If occurring frequently - service tool.

X

X

 

2014

Warning

Tool overheated

Tool overheated.

Allow tool to cool down.

X

X

 

2015

Error

Tool temperature sensor error

 

Service tool.

X

X

2016

Warning

Tool pulse unit overheated

Tool pulse unit overheated. Tool is not locked, but the warning is displayed whenever the tool is started as long as the pulse unit temperature is over threshold.

Allow tool to cool down

X

X

2019

Warning

Tool could not start motor

Tool motor failure.

X

X

2020

Warning

Tool requires motor tuning

Tool requires motor tuning.

Perform a motor tuning.

X

X

 

2021

Warning

Motor tuning failed

Motor tuning failed.

Complete motor tuning or service the tool.

X

 

 

2022

Info

Motor tuning completed

Motor tuning completed.

N/A

X

 

 

2023

Warning

The tool requires open end tuning

The tool requires open end tuning.

Perform open end tuning.

X

X

 

2024

Warning

Open end tuning failed

Open end tuning failed.

Try to perform open end tuning one more time. If it fails again, service the tool.

X

 

 

2025

Info

Open end tuning successful

Open end tuning successful.

N/A

X

 

 

2026

Warning

Open end position failed

Open end position failed.

Press the trigger again and wait for the positioning to be completed. If it fails again, service the tool.

X

X

 

2027

Warning

Usage limited due to high tool temperature

Temperature limit has been reached. Tightening has been inhibited to reduce risk for tool shutting down due to overheating.

Wait until tool temperature has been reduced.

X

X

 

2030

Error

Tool memory failure, change tool

Tool memory corrupt.

Service the tool.

X

X

X

2031

Error

Tool accessory memory corrupt

Tool accessory memory corrupt.

Service the tool accessory.

X

X

X

2040

Error

System check failure

 

X

X

X

2041

Error

Torque transducer error

Will be generated either on calibration error or if tool reports transducer error.

Service the tool.

X

X

 

2042

Error

Angle transducer error

 

Service the tool.

X

X

X

2043

Error

Tool ground fault error

 

Service the tool.

X

X

X

2044

Info

Tool service interval expired

Indicates that servicing of the tool is needed. Triggered when the number of set tightenings has been exceeded.

Perform service of tool.

X

X

 

2045

Warning

Tool calibration data invalid

If validation of calibration data fails.

Service tool.

X

X

 

2046

Info

Tool, next calibration date has passed

Indicates that calibration of tool is needed. Triggered when calibration alarm is enabled in settings and the current time is greater than next calibration date.

Service tool.

X

X

 

2047

Info

Auto update of servicedata checksum

Indicates that service data checksum has been updated automatically.

N/A

X

X

 

2048

Info

Tool calibration value updated by QA device

Tool calibration was updated when a calibration with a QA device was performed

X

X

2050

Error

Tool parameter file not supported

Required tool parameters are missing.

Update tool parameters.

X

X

 

2060

Info

Unexpected trigger behavior

Used to prevent start of tool if accessory is connected.

N/A

X

X

 

2071

Error

Tool memory corrupt

Tool descriptor is corrupt.

Service the tool.

X

X

 

2072

Info

Unknown device connected

 

X

X

 

2073

Warning

Tool trigger supervision failure

HW channel failure. Mismatch between hardware and software of tool trigger.

X

X

 

2074

Warning

Tool indicator board failure

Tool indicator board failure.

Service the tool.

X

X

 

2075

Warning

Tool fan voltage failure

Tool fan voltage failure.

Service the tool.

X

X

 

2076

Warning

Tool accessory bus voltage failure

Tool accessory bus voltage failure.

Service the tool.

X

X

 

2077

Warning

Tool trigger sensor error

Tool trigger sensor error.

Service the tool.

X

X

2078

Info

Tool Tightening program updated

Tool locked due to tightening program update.

X

X

 

2079

Error

Tool cable not supported

Tool cable is corrupt. The chip in the cable is not responding or is damaged.

Switch cable.

X

X

 

2080

Error

Tool battery failure

DC voltage too high or too low. Battery failure.

Contact the Atlas Copco service representative and send back battery to Atlas Copco (do not reuse it!).

X

X

 

2081

Error

Tool current limit reached

The current limit has been reached and the drive is disabled.

Service the tool.

X

X

 

2082

Error

Tool current measurement error

Current measurement error. Current cannot be measured with a reliable result.

Service the tool.

X

X

 

2083

Error

Tool internal error

Various internal hardware errors.

Service the tool.

X

X

 

2084

Error

Tool internal software error

Various internal software errors.

Service the tool.

X

X

 

2085

Error

Tool RBU error

An RBU error was detected by the tool software.

Check that the RBU is correctly installed. If error is still present then service the tool.

X

X

 

2086

Error

Tool stall

Tool motor is stalling.

Service the tool.

X

X

 

2087

Warning

Tool motor current high

Tool motor current limit is exceeded, and the tool is locked. Tool will enter failsafe mode.

X

X

2088

Warning

Tool battery current high

Tool battery current is too high.

X

X

2089

Warning

Tool drive voltage low

Tool drive voltage is below the monitored lower voltage limit.

X

X

2090

Warning

Tool drive voltage high

Tool drive voltage is above monitored higher voltage limit.

X

X

 

2091

Warning

Tool main board error

Tool main board internal error.

X

X

2092

Warning

Tool power module error

Tool power module internal error

X

X

2093

Warning

Pulse unit oil level low

The oil level of the connected pulse tool is low.

Service the tool

X

X

2094

Warning

Pulse unit oil level empty

The oil level of the connected pulse tool is below required operational level

Service the tool

X

X

X

2095

Warning

Tool battery communication lost

Tool lost communication with battery.

Make sure battery is seated correctly. Otherwise change battery

X

X

2096

Error

Tool battery software version mismatch

Tool battery software incompatible with tool software.

Update software.

X

X

2100

Info

STwrench smartHead removed

STwrench smartHead has been removed.

Reconnect smartHead and restart the wrench.

X

X

 

2101

Warning

Wrench tightening when locked

A wrench tightening was performed when the tool status was locked in the controller.

Wait until the tool status in controller is unlocked.

X

X

 

3000

Error

Controller internal software error

Software error in the controller.

Contact service.

X

X

X

3001

Error

Controller clock battery empty

Internal battery is getting close to end of life.

Replace battery

X

X

X

3010

Warning

System overheated

The controller is overheated.

Cool down.

X

X

 

3011

Warning

Drive overheated Controller hardware

Cool down.

X

X

3013

Warning

Usage limited due to high controller temperature

Temperature limit has been reached. Tightening has been inhibited to reduce risk for controller shutting down due to overheating.

Wait until controller temperature has been reduced.

X

X

3020

Warning

Controller hardware failure

X

X

3021

Warning

System voltage problem

DC voltage too high or too low.

N/A

X

X

 

3030

Error

IP address conflicting with another node on the network

The set IP address is in use by another device on the same network.

Change IP address on one of the devices.

X

X

 

3031

Info

Network cable unplugged

The carrier of the factory port is lost (cable disconnected).

Check the cable connection.

X

X

 

3032

Info

Pairing started

Tool pairing started.

N/A

X

X

 

3033

Info

Pairing successful

Tool pairing successful.

N/A

X

X

 

3034

Error

Pairing unsuccessful: no tool found

The controller found no tool to pair with when scanning for radio peers.

Set the tool in pairing mode and try again.

X

X

 

3035

Error

Pairing unsuccessful: more than one tool found

The controller found more than one tool when scanning for radio peers.

Ensure that only one tool is in pairing mode when starting the pairing mode on the controller.

X

X

 

3036

Error

Pairing unsuccessful: Communication error

The controller experienced a loss of connection, an unexpected answer or timeout during the pairing process.

Try to perform pairing one more time. If it fails again, service the tool.

X

X

 

3037

Info

Pairing unsuccessful: Tool slot is full

Clear one tool slot

X

X

3040

Warning

Emergency stop

Drive disabled due to emergency stop.

Reset emergency stop.

X

X

 

3050

Info

System clock updated

System clock has been updated.

N/A

X

 

 

3051

Error

System clock error

Wrong time read from hardware Real Time Clock (RTC).

Change RTC battery.

X

X

X

3052

Warning

Remote start configuration error

Mismatch between HW and SW remote start configuration.

Check and verify that HW dip switch matches the selected start source.

X

X

 

3053

Info

Drive connected

StepSync drive has been connected.

X

X

3054

Info

Drive disconnected

StepSync drive disconnected.

X

X

3055

Warning

Mode configuration error

Generated when selected mode is configured wrongly. E.g. configuring two bolts with the same bolt number or the same channel, incomplete mode configuration

Check Toolstalk2 for mode configuration error

X

X

3056

Warning

Unable to start, tool or drive is missing

Generated when a used channel is missing a drive or tool.

Check Channel Menu on the HMI. Connect missing drive or tool.

X

X

3057

Info

Unable to start, channel is already in use

Generated when a needed channel has been allocated to another virtual station

X

X

3058

info

No mode selected

Select mode

X

X

3059

Warning

Failed to connect to Atlas Copco License Manager

Indicates that the controller failed to connect to the local license manager to get licenses.

Check local network. If it fails again, service the controller.

X

X

 

3084

Error

Soft PLC runtime error

eCLR has terminated in an uncontrolled way.

X

X

3150

Error

Software IAM incompatibility

IAM is incompatible with the software installed on the controller.

Replace IAM.

X

X

X

3160

Error

Failed to activate newly installed software

Something went wrong during the activation. When the newly installed software starts, a fallback to the previous working software happens. This happens when the new software fails to start for three times and only during software installation.

Take an export and contact Atlas Copco for further assistance. Note down the software version you are trying to install as well as the software version that is working.

X

X

X

3161

Error

Started on unexpected software partition

The controller has started on the inactive software side and not on the expected software side.

Note down the software information (on the Home page of the controller, select Controller > Software). Try to restart the controller and make sure its running on correct software when started again. If error persists, do an export and contact Atlas Copco.

X

X

X

3500

Error

Generic license manager error

Inconsistency detected in the feature management system used.

Contact Atlas Copco representative.

X

X

X

3501

Error

License Manager Synchronization Error

 

X

X

X

3502

Info

License Manager Synchronization Done

 

X

 

3503

Warning

License manager: another source in use

License is used by another source.

Check license assignment

X

X

3504

Warning

License manager restart needed

Restart license manager

X

X

3505

Info

USB license synchronization started

X

3506

Error

USB license synchronization error

X

3507

Info

USB license synchronization done

X

3508

Info

One or more of your licenses are about to expire. Please make sure you have a license server configured

Update licenses

X

X

3511

Warning

One of your licenses has a different license definition

Inconsistency detected in a license to be used.

Contact Atlas Copco representative.

X

X

3550

Warning

License is missing

Install the correct license

X

X

4010

Info

Tool locked by digital input

The tool is locked by a digital input signal.

N/A

X

X

 

4011

Info

Tool locked by open protocol

The tool is locked by open protocol.

N/A

X

X

 

4012

Info

Tool locked by field bus

The tool is locked by the field bus.

N/A

X

X

 

4013

Info

Tool locked by socket selector

Tool is locked when the socket selector is disconnected from the Virtual Station.

Unlock by Master unlock

X

X

4014

Info

Tool locked by Soft PLC

Soft PLC signal locked the tool.

Unlock by Master Unlock

X

X

4015

Info

Loosening disabled

Loosening is disabled in the tightening program

X

X

 

4016

Info

Tightening disabled

 

X

X

 

4017

Info

Loosening not configured

Loosening is not configured in the selected tightening program

Select different tightening program

X

X

4020

Info

Too many NOK tightenings

Maximum consecutive NOK tightenings in batch is exceeded

X

X

 

4025

Info

No Tightening program selected

No tightening program selected.

Select tightening program or batch sequence.

X

X

4030

Info

Batch sequence aborted

The batch sequence has been aborted.

X

X

4031

Info

Max time to complete batch sequence reached.

 

X

X

 

4032

Info

Max time to complete first tightening reached.

 

X

X

 

4035

Info

Locked by line control

 

X

X

 

4040

Info

Locked by alternative identifier

Tool locked by alternative identifier.

X

X

 

4050

Invalid socket configuration

Tightening program assigned to multiple sockets.

Tightening program assigned to multiple sockets

X

X

 

4060

Info

Tool locked on batch complete

When running a batch with flag Tool lock on batch sequence complete this event is generated when the user press the trigger.

Unlock with signal Unlock Tool on complete.

X

X

 

4070

Info

Process enter manual mode

Indicates that manual mode has been activated for a virtual station

4071

Info

Process enter automatic mode

Indicates that automatic mode has been entered for a virtual station

4500

Info

Result DriveError

Internal driver error or driver loss detected.

 

 

 

 

4501

Info

Result Rehit

Attempt to tighten an already tightened bolt when Rehit detection is on.

 

 

 

 

4502

Info

Result Soft Start Torque Low

Soft start torque below minimum level.

 

 

 

 

4503

Info

Result Soft Start Torque High

Soft start torque exceeded maximum level.

 

 

 

 

4504

Info

Result Self Tap Torque High

Selftap torque exceeded maximum level.

 

 

 

 

4505

Info

Result Self Tap Torque Low

Selftap torque below minimum limit.

 

 

 

 

4506

Info

Result Safety Torque Low

Automatically calculated torque value to ensure torque sensor is mounted correctly.

 

 

 

 

4507

Info

Result Rundown Torque High

Rundown torque exceeded maximum level.

 

 

 

 

4508

Info

Result Rundown Angle High

Rundown angle exceeded maximum level.

 

 

 

 

4509

Info

Result Rundown Time High

Rundown time exceeded maximum limit.

 

 

 

 

4510

Info

Result Rundown Time Low

Rundown time below minimum limit.

 

 

 

 

4511

Info

Result Rundown Torque Low

Rundown torque below minimum level.

 

 

 

 

4512

Info

Result Rundown Angle Low

Rundown angle below minimum level.

 

 

 

 

4513

Info

Result Final Torque High

Final step torque exceeded maximum level.

 

 

 

 

4514

Info

Result Final Angle High

Final step angle exceeded maximum level.

 

 

 

 

4515

Info

Result Final Torque Low

Final step torque below minimum level.

 

 

 

 

4516

Info

Result Final Angle Low

Final step angle below minimum level.

 

 

 

 

4517

Info

Result Tightening Timeout

Tightening time limit exceeded. For General Tightening Strategies max tightening time is 30 seconds. For Multistep max tightening time depends on step restriction Maximum Time Limit. Error code is dependent on tightening stage.

Redo tightening.

 

 

 

4518

Info

Result Trigger Lost

Tool trigger was released before target was reached.

For General Tightening Strategies it is not allowed to release the trigger before the tightening stage has finished.

For Multistep, the error is displayed when trigger is lost before the target in a specific step is reached.

 

 

 

 

4519

Info

Premature torque loss

Socket has slipped off the nut.

 

 

 

 

4520

Info

Result Target Reached Before Final Step

Target torque reached before final step in tightening program.

 

 

 

 

4521

Info

Result Post View Torque Low

Post view torque below minimum level.

 

 

 

 

4522

Info

Result Post View Torque High

Post view torque exceeded maximum level.

 

 

 

 

4523

Info

Result Post View Torque Interval Not Reached

Post view torque interval not reached.

 

 

 

 

4524

Info

Result Torque Compensation Interval Not Reached

Torque compensation interval angle before rundown end not reached.

 

 

 

 

4525

Info

Result Tool movement exceeded

from a NOK tightening detailed status.

 

 

 

 

4526

Info

Result SafetyCurrMon Sensor Mismatch

Current monitoring error.

 

 

 

 

4527

Info

Result Tool movement exceeded

 

 

 

 

 

4528

Info

Result Soft Start Angle High

Soft start angle exceeded maximum level (Four Step).

 

 

 

 

4529

Info

Result Soft Start Angle Low

Soft start angle below minimum level (Four Step).

 

 

 

 

4530

Info

Result First Angle High

First step angle exceeded maximum level (Four Step).

 

 

 

 

4531

Info

Result First Angle Low

First step angle below minimum level (Four Step).

 

 

 

 

4532

Info

Result First Torque High

First step torque exceeded maximum level (Four Step).

 

 

 

 

4533

Info

Result First Torque Low

First step torque below minimum level (Four Step).

 

 

 

 

4534

Info

Result First Time High

First step time exceeded maximum level (Four Step).

 

 

 

 

4535

Info

Result First Time Low

First step time below minimum level (Four Step).

 

 

 

 

4536

Info

Result Final Time High

Final step time exceeded maximum level (Four Step).

 

 

 

 

4537

Info

Result Final Time Low

Final step time below minimum level (Four Step).

 

 

 

 

4538

Info

Result Final Supervision Torque Low

Final Supervision Torque was not reached.

 

 

 

 

4539

Info

Result Soft Start Time High

Soft start time exceeded maximum level (Four Step).

 

 

 

 

4540

Info

Result Soft Start Time Low

Soft start time below minimum level (Four Step).

 

 

 

 

4543

Info

Result Snug Monitor High

Wrench only. Monitor detected snug value exceeded.

4545

Info

Result No Residual Torque

Wrench only. Residual torque was under threshold.

4546

Info

Result Overspeed

Wrench only. Wrench gyro failed to measure angle due to high speed.

4547

Info

Result Effective Loosening

Wrench only. Wrench detected unexpected loosening.

4548

Info

Result Final Less Than Target

Final torque is below target torque set in tightening program.

4549

Info

TurboTight time limit exceeded

TurboTight time limit exceeded.

4550

Info

Result Rundown Pulses High

Maximum number of rundown pulses is exceeded.

4551

Info

Result Rundown Pulses Low

Rundown is completed before the minimum number of rundown pulses is reached.

4552

Info

Result Final Pulses High

maximum number of pulses is exceeded.

4553

Info

Result Final Pulses Low

Tightening is completed before the minimum number of pulses is reached.

4554

Info

Current at shutoff high

Current at shut off exceeded Current Limit High.

4555

Info

Current at shutoff low

Shut off current measured was below Current Limit Low

4556

Info

Uncategorized multistep error.

An error in the multistep configuration, often in conjunction with tool validation.

4557

Info

Result overload

X

X

4600

Warning

Data Drop or Data Hold used in combination with Batch tightening. The signals have no effect.

Data Drop and Data Hold are only supported for worktasks, without batch control. Select another worktask if the signals has to be used.

Valid only for Flex and StepSync.

X

4601

Info

Data Hold active: tightening result is sent once signal is low.

Valid only for Flex and StepSync.

X

4602

Info

Data Drop active: tightening result discarded.

Valid only for Flex and StepSync.

X

5010

Warning

Invalid Tightening program parameter value

The parameter in the selected tightening program are invalid.

Check the configuration of the selected tightening program to find and change the value of the parameter.

X

X

 

5020

Info

Main trigger is not the active start source

Generated when configured for push start only and user presses main trigger. Will be generated until user presses the push start.

Press push start to start the tool.

X

X

 

5030

Info

Tightening program complexity exceeds tool Capacity

The selected tightening program is too complex for the tool. Tool will be locked.

Reduce complexity of the tightening program, or choose different program

X

X

6010

Info

Accessory connected

Accessory is connected to the controller.

 

X

X

6020

Info

Accessory disconnected

Accessory is disconnected from the controller.

 

X

X

6021

Warning

Fieldbus offline

No communication with fieldbus.

X

X

X

6030

Warning

Accessory address collision

Two or more accessories with the same address are connected.

Change address on accessory.

X

X

X

6040

Warning

Accessory communication error

Intermittent communication error with accessory.

Check cables and connectors.

X

X

 

6041

Warning

Fieldbus error

Communication error with fieldbus.

 

X

X

X

6042

Warning

Fieldbus module mismatch

The installed fieldbus module does not match with the configured module.

Change the configuration to match with the installed module, or replace the installed module with the correct one.

X

X

X

6050

Info

Wrong socket selected

Generated when no or incorrect socket is selected.

X

X

 

6090

Warning

Barcode scanner could not be identified

When no unique serial number is found.

Configure the barcode reader device.

X

X

X

7010

Info

Message text to display

General event for displaying of messages.

None

 

 

X

8200

Info

Failed to Open Serial Port

Serial port to be used could not be opened.

Check serial port connections.

X

8214

Error

EHMI Software version mismatch

EHMI software version does not match in compatibility with the controller.

Update the software version of the EHMI.

X

X

Viewing NOK Ratio

To view NOK ratio:
  1. Go to Reports in the home menu and select NOK Ratio in the left pane.

  2. Select View 10 highest NOK tightening programs.

SPC - Statistical Process Control

The purpose of the built-in SPC function is to give the operator, or quality control staff, data that lets them judge the stability and capability of the assembly process according to standard SPC rules.
By configuring the tool's SPC function it is possible to simplify and do the work directly on the tool without the need of external software.
Since it is possible to use program monitors within the tool as a SPC variable, it is necessary to specify that only variables controlled by the tool show the performance of the system. Other variables show mainly results from other processes. For example, if a torque value is applied to a joint, then SPC of the final torque value and the related results - such as Cp and Cpk - show the performance of the tool on that joint.

Statistical calculations are based on old data stored in the tool.

In this Section
  • Configuring SPC Parameters
  • Configuring SPC Variables
  • Calculating Statistics
  • Viewing Statistics Results

Configuring SPC Parameters

  1. Go to Reports in the home menu and select Statistics in the left pane.

  2. In the SPC Configuration window, enter the following parameters to collect results stored on the tool:

    • Number of Subgroups: enter the number of subgroups the statistics calculation is based upon.
      The number of results (Number of Subgroups × Subgroup Size) can range from 2 through 500.

    • Subgroup Size: enter the number of tests (samples) necessary to define each point (the average value of the tests in the subgroup) on the SPC charts.
      The subgroup size can range from 2 through 25.

    • Frequency: enter how often to start collecting a new subgroup.
      Frequency must be equal or higher than Subgroup size.

      For instance, if Frequency is 8 and Subgroup Size is 5, the first 5 data (results) is used for the subgroup. Because of the Frequency =8, the next subgroup starts considering data (results) from the 8th one on, and so on in a loop.

Configuring SPC Variables

  1. Go to Reports in the home menu and select Statistics in the left pane.

  2. Select the Plus icon in the upper-right corner.
    The SPC Variable window shows the new variable.

  3. In the Name box, enter the name of the variable.
    The name of the variable is the heading of the SPC Variable window.

  4. Select Tightening Program.
    The Tightening Program window appears and lists all the multistep tightening programs stored on the tool and available for statistical calculations.
    Select the multistep tightening program of the new variable.

  5. Select Virtual Station.
    The Virtual Station window appears.
    Select the Virtual Station which the results are used from.

    Statistics are based on results made by a Virtual Station that has the following license type assigned:

    • Process Control

  6. Select Monitor.
    The Monitor window appears.
    Select one of the following program monitors which the SPC calculation is based on:

    • Step monitor peak torque

    • Step monitor angle

    • Final torque

    • Final angle

    • Program monitor torque

    • Program monitor angle

    If the user selects Step monitor peak torque or Step monitor angle, in the Step number box enter the number of the necessary step of the tightening program which read the value from.

    If the user uses the result reporters, it is possible to have an effect on the following monitor values: Final torque and Final angle.

  7. Select Edit limits.
    The Variable configuration window appears.
    For calculations and analysis of the results, set the following limits for each value of interest.

In the Tolerance limits window, set the following limits (used for calculation of the process capabilities Cp and Cpk):

  • Upper Tolerance Limit (UTL): a user-defined quantity that identifies the highest acceptable value of a product attribute.

  • Lower Tolerance Limit (LTL): a user-defined quantity that identifies the lowest acceptable value of a product attribute.

In the Control limits window, enable or disable the Auto calculate switch.
If the Auto calculate switch is set to Yes, the control limits are automatically calculated.
If the Auto calculate switch is set to No, set the following limits:

  • Mean - Upper control limit: a statistically determined measurement that appears as a horizontal dashed line above the process average. Generally considered to be three times the standard deviation of the process measurements.

  • Mean - Lower control limit: a statistically determined value that appears as a horizontal dashed line below the process average. Generally considered to be three times the standard deviation of the process measurements.

  • Range - Upper control limit: a statistically determined measurement that appears as a horizontal dashed line above the process average. Generally considered to be three times the standard deviation of the process measurements.

  • Range - Lower control limit: a statistically determined value that appears as a horizontal dashed line below the process average. Generally considered to be three times the standard deviation of the process measurements.

  • Sigma - Upper control limit: a statistically determined measurement that appears as a horizontal dashed line above the process average. Generally considered to be three times the standard deviation of the process measurements.

  • Sigma - Lower control limit: a statistically determined value that appears as a horizontal dashed line below the process average. Generally considered to be three times the standard deviation of the process measurements.

In the Capabilities window, set the following limits:

  • Cp: the Cp index gives the process capability: it is the number of times the spread of the process is into the tolerance width (Upper tolerance limit - Lower tolerance limit). The higher the value of Cp, the better the process.

  • Cpk: the Cpk index gives the process capability corrected for the position. It is not useful having a high Cp index if the process setting is way off center in relation to the middle of the tolerance range. A high Cpk index means, then, that you have a good process with a small spread in relation to the tolerance width, and also that it is well centered within that width (Upper tolerance limit - Lower tolerance limit). If Cpk is equal to Cp, the process is set to produce exactly in the middle of the tolerance range.

Calculating Statistics

  1. Go to Reports in the home menu and select Statistics in the left pane.

  2. In the SPC Configuration window, enter the parameters to collect results stored on the tool (Number of Subgroups, Subgroup Size, and Frequency).

  3. Select the Plus icon at the upper-right corner.
    The SPC Variable window shows the new variable.
    Configure the new SPC Variable.

  4. In the SPC Variable window, select Calculate.
    Data is collected from the historical results stored in the controller that are aligned with the criteria set in the SPC Configuration window and SPC Variable window. The values of interest are collected into subgroups of the size set in the SPC Configuration window. The collected tightening results on the controller are used for statistics calculations.

It is not possible to calculate statistics for results from deleted tightening programs or Virtual Stations, unless the results are still stored on the tool.

Only one user at a time can calculate statistics.

Statistics Formulas

Data in a subgroup is calculated as:

  • Average:

  • Range = R = max (Xi) - min (Xi), where i=1...n

  • Standard deviation for a subgroup:

  • Total overall of the standard deviation:

    Where N = total number of observations.

When specified number of subgroups to use for calculations has been collected, the SPC function starts calculations to determine the statistical stability.
Calculations are performed through the following steps: (m = number of subgroups)

  • Calculation of Average of Average values:

  • Calculation of Average of Range:

  • Calculation of Average of Standard deviation:

  • Calculation of the process capabilities Cp and Cpk with respect to Sigma:

    Where:

    • is the overall arithmetic average of the observed characteristic values.

    • UTL is the Upper Tolerance Limit.

    • LTL is the Lower Tolerance Limit.

    • The sigma estimation is the mean square standard deviation within the subgroups:

  • Calculation of the process capabilities Cp and Cpk with respect to Range:

    Where for a normal distribution su = sl = 3.

Calculations for control limits if, in the SPC Configuration window, the Auto calculate switch is set to Yes:

  • X-bar R (Mean)

  • X-bar R (Range)

  • X-bar S (Mean)

  • X-bar S (Sigma)

A2, A3, D3, D4, B3, and B4 are constants (for more information, see the "SPC Calculation Constants" paragraph).

SPC Calculations Constants

Subgroup Size

Divisors for estimate of standard dev.

Factors for Control Limits

Xbar R

Xbar S

A2

D3

D4

A3

B3

B4

n

d2

2

1.128

1.880

-

3.267

2.659

-

3.267

3

1.693

1.023

-

2.574

1.954

-

2.568

4

2.059

0.729

-

2.282

1.628

-

2.266

5

2.326

0.577

-

2.114

1.427

-

2.089

6

2.534

0.483

-

2.004

1.287

0.030

1.970

7

2.704

0.419

0.076

1.924

1.182

0.118

1.882

8

2.847

0.373

0.136

1.864

1.099

0.185

1.815

9

2.970

0.337

0.184

1.816

1.032

0.239

1.761

10

3.078

0.308

0.223

1.777

0.975

0.284

1.716

11

3.173

0.285

0.256

1.744

0.927

0.321

1.679

12

3.258

0.266

0.283

1.717

0.886

0.354

1.646

13

3.336

0.249

0.307

1.693

0.850

0.382

1.618

14

3.407

0.235

0.328

1.672

0.817

0.406

1.594

15

3.472

0.223

0.347

1.653

0.789

0.428

1.572

16

3.532

0.212

0.363

1.637

0.763

0.448

1.552

17

3.588

0.203

0.378

1.622

0.739

0.466

1.534

18

3.640

0.194

0.391

1.608

0.718

0.482

1.518

19

3.689

0.187

0.403

1.597

0.698

0.497

1.503

20

3.735

0.180

0.415

1.585

0.680

0.510

1.490

21

3.778

0.173

0.425

1.575

0.663

0.523

1.477

22

3.819

0.167

0.434

1.566

0.647

0.534

1.466

23

3.858

0.162

0.443

1.557

0.633

0.545

1.455

24

3.895

0.157

0.451

1.548

0.619

0.555

1.445

25

3.931

0.153

0.459

1.541

0.606

0.565

1.435

Viewing Statistics Results

  1. Go to Reports in the home menu and select Statistics in the left pane.

  2. In the SPC Configuration window, enter the following parameters: Number of Subgroups, Subgroup Size, and Frequency.

  3. Select the Plus icon at the upper-right corner.
    The SPC Variable window shows the new variable.
    Configure the new SPC Variable.

  4. In the SPC Variable window, select Calculate.

  5. To show the statistics results, in the SPC Variable window, select View box.
    View box shows the date and time which the statistics results have been done.
    The statistical results are displayed through a histogram, the XBar-R chart, and the XBar-S chart.

    When all calculations on the filtered results are done, they are sent to the user interface and ToolsTalk 2.
    The statistics results are locally saved on a Temporary Internet Files folder (not saved on the tool).

Histogram

A histogram is a series of rectangles, each proportional in width to the range of values within a class and proportional in height to the number of samples falling in the class. A Gaussian curve follows the trend of the rectangles. A histogram reveals the amount of variation that any process has within it.
The histogram is useful because it emphasizes and clarifies trends that are not readily discernible in tables.

XBar-R Chart

The XBar-R control chart shows both the mean value (XBar) and the range (R) of a subgroup. This is the most common type of control chart using indiscrete or continuous values. The XBar part of the chart shows any changes in the mean value of the process while the R part shows any changes in the dispersion of the process.
This chart is particularly useful because it shows changes in mean value and dispersion of the process at the same time, making it a very effective method for checking abnormalities in the process.

XBar-S Chart

The XBar-S control chart shows both the mean value (XBar) Chart and the standard deviation (S).
The XBar-S chart is identical to the XBar-R chart except that the R (range) is replaced by an S (standard deviation).

Calculated Statistical Values

The calculated statistical values are displayed in information boxes below the histogram, the XBar-R chart, and the XBar-S chart.

The calculated values depend on the chart which they are read on.

The calculated statistical values are:

  • Min = minimum value for all collected sample values

  • Max = maximum value for all collected sample values

  • Mean =

  • Mean+3Sigma = + 3*stdDev

  • Mean-3Sigma = - 3*stdDev

  • Cp (in XBar-R chart the value is based on range, and in XBar-S chart the value is based on sigma)

  • Cpk (in XBar-R chart the value is based on range, and in XBar-S chart the value is based on sigma)

  • Center line = in Range part , and in Sigma part

  • Target (if available the target value for the monitor)

  • Standard deviation = Total overall standard deviation = stdDev

Reference

In this section, you can find miscellaneous useful information.

In this Section
  • Terms and Definitions
  • Input Signals
  • Output Signals
  • Input/Output Signals
  • List of Third-Party Licenses

Terms and Definitions

Term

Synonym

Definition

Note

batch

multiple tightening using the same tightening program and socket

batch sequence

sequence

multiple tightening using a combination of different tightening programs and sockets

controller feature

License for controller-wide features, such as Soft PLC and StepSync.

Are assigned to an entire controller and can be used by all virtual stations.

event

controller and tool status signals

final angle

actual measured angle value at the end of the tightening cycle

final torque

actual measured torque value at the end of the tightening cycle

GUI

 

user interface made up of interactive graphical elements such as windows, icons and symbols on a display

 

HMI

Human Machine Interface

user interface to tool or controller

The HMI can be a computer web-based interface or controller touch screen.

IAM

Intelligent Application Module

removable module in controller containing program, configuration parameters and tightening results

line structure

sorting and grouping controllers in structures, folders or sub-folders in ToolsTalk

The line structure is a method for improving the visibility of a large group of controllers in a structured manner.

post view torque

function for monitoring and detecting torque maximum and minimum values before rundown is complete

One purpose of post view torque is the use of a self-locking nut.

tightening program

Parameter set

configuration of parameters and values to control and monitor a single tightening action, and to store the tightening result

push

transfer of data saved in ToolsTalk to the controller memory

QIF

Quality Integrated Fastening

fully integrated line of nutrunners, controllers, accessories and process monitoring tools to guarantee high quality and traceability of tightening in industrial assembly systems

QIF was developed at Atlas Copco and is preferably used in motor vehicle industry and other assembly situations where many joints are critical. The QIF concept also includes process monitoring and documentation.

QIF accessory

accessory for operator communication and guidance used in QIF

Accessory products used for communication between system and operator. For example: scanner, operator panel, stacklight and socket selector. The communication provides improved quality and traceability in the assembly process.

Re-hit detection

detection of re-tightening of an already tightened joint

rotate

tightening strategy which rotates the tool head.

Rotate is mainly used for test or demonstration purposes.

rundown complete

end of the rundown step, when the screw head is in contact with the surface and the tightening step begins

rundown step

step when a bolt enters the thread until the bolt head touches the surface

snug

screw or bolt is approximately finger-tight to the surface

socket selector

QIF accessory, consisting of a socket tray with lamps, that can be used to guide an operator to the correct socket

soft start

start tightening at slow speed during a specified rotation angle

The function helps the bolt to enter the thread in a well controlled way and may prevent unwanted ergonomic tool movement when the trigger is pressed.

stacklight

QIF accessory, which handles the communication between operator and controller through digital signals like lamps, buttons, switches and buzzer

target

desired result of a tightening

The target is expressed in torque or angle.

target angle

desired angle value at the end of the tightening cycle, measured from a reference point

target torque

desired torque value at the end of the tightening cycle

tightening step

step from when a bolt head has reached the surface until the tightening has reached the desired target torque or target angle

tightening strategy

algorithm which continuously controls and monitors the tightening process

The user can select a strategy optimized for the joint and program certain parameters.

virtual station

virtual controller

software abstraction of a physical controller to behave like multiple controllers

A controller can have only one cable tool connected to it, but several wireless tools. Each tool is connected to its own virtual station.

virtual station type

License containing a bundle of controller features.

This license is required for running a virtual station.

virtual station feature

License for individual features.

Can be used to complement Virtual station type licenses.

Input Signals

Converter
Signal Type
Value Type
Size Min [bit]
Size Max [bit]
Devices

Abort Sequence - 10012

When a Batch sequence abort request is received, the Batch sequence functionality aborts the batch sequence only after getting the ongoing tightening result.

Name in SoftPLC: ABORT_BATCH_SEQUENCE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Acknowledge Events - 10004

Acknowledge of an event.

Name in SoftPLC: ACKNOWLEDGE_EVENT

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Activate Tool Scanner - 10075

Activates the tool scanner through an external source.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVATE_TOOL_SCANNER

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Decrement - 10002

Incrementally decreases the batch counter by one.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_DECREMENT

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Increment - 10001

Incrementally increases the batch counter by one.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_INCREMENT

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bypass Identifier - 10123

In source batch string used to bypass an identifier string in string receiving sequence.

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bypass Tightening Program - 10008

Skips the next tightening program in the running batch sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: BYPASS_PSET

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Disable Fieldbus - 10049

Disables the fieldbus.

Name in SoftPLC: DISABLE_FIELDBUS

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Disable Loosening at OK Tight - 20022

This lock signal is used to disable loosening after an OK tightening.

Name in SoftPLC:

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Disable tool - 30000

If the signal is set to True, a tool is immediately stopped and locked.

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Disable Tool Scanner - 10119

Disables tool scanner when scanning by tool trigger when signal is set. It is still possible to scan by using the scan button but the scan string is ignored.

Name in SoftPLC: DISABLE_TOOL_SCANNER

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Dynamic Batch Size - 10074

Name in SoftPLC: DYNAMIC_BATCH_SIZE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

External OK - 10063

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_OK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus Lock Loosening - 20021

A Virtual Station is locked when starting a loosening if the signal is set from a connected and supported accessory.
An ongoing loosening is aborted immediately when Fieldbus Lock Loosening is set to True, due to the Stop Drive setting.

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus Lock Tightening - 20020

A Virtual Station is locked when starting a tightening if the signal is set from a connected and supported accessory.
An ongoing tightening is aborted immediately when Fieldbus Lock Tightening is set to True, due to the Stop Drive setting.

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Flush Read Result Queue - 30005

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

ID for Dynamic Batch Size - 10073

Name in SoftPLC: DYNAMIC_BATCH_SIZE_TPID

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Integer

1

16

TreatZeroAsOne

State

Integer

1

16

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Lock Loosening - 20003

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Lock Tightening - 20002

Tool locked for tightening by digital input.

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Lock Tool Active High - 20004

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Lock Tool Active Low - 20061

Locks the tool when this signal is low.

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Manual Mode - 10061

Used to set the Virtual Station in manual mode.

If the signal is True (high) the signal 101 - Manual mode is high.
If the signal is False (low) the signal 101 - Manual mode is low.

Name in SoftPLC: SET_MANUAL_MODE

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Relevant Information
  • Manual Mode - 101

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Master Unlock - 10005

Unlocks most locks defined in lock page.

Name in SoftPLC: MASTER_UNLOCK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Pulse Stop - 10030

If this signal is generated any ongoing tightening or loosening will be stopped. Used in combination with 10024 or 10072.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_STOP_PULSE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Read Result Handshake Ack - 30004

Enable the Read Result Handshake feature in the Fieldbus device for making the controller available for the signal Rear Result Handshake Ack.

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Reset All Identifiers - 10115

In Source batch string used to reset all received string identifiers from string receiving sequence at once. In other worktasks clears VIN number.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_ALL_IDENTIFIERS

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Batch - 10003

Resets the batch counter to 0. No batch OK (nxOK). If batch OK is activated, it will be deactivated.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_BATCH

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Batch Sequence - 10053

Resets the Batch Sequence. Unlocks a tool that is locked by Tool Lock on Complete.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_BATCH_SEQUENCE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Bistable Relay - 10022

Reset the bistable relay output.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_BISTABLE_RELAY

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Latest Identifier - 10114

In Source batch string used to reset latest received string from string receiving sequence. In other worktasks clears VIN number.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_LATEST_IDENTIFIER

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Relays - 10120

Resets all signals.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_RELAYS

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Sequence Status - 10118

Resets signals Batch Sequence Done/OK/NOK and Sequence Aborted.

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_SEQUENCE_STATUS

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Reset Too Many NOK - 10013

Reset the batch after receiving lock Too Many NOK

Name in SoftPLC: RESET_TOO_MANY_NOK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input - 10020

Selects Tightening Program withing Source Tightening/Batch within sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_INPUT_VALUE

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Integer

1

16

TreatZeroAsOne

State

Integer

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Select Input and Dynamic Batch Size - 30007

It is used to set the Batch Size for a specific "Identifier Number" in a Source Tightening Task, running "External batch control".

Batch size can be set to 1-250.

If Batch size is set to 0, it is treated as infinite batch. The user is not able to un-set a Batch back to a state where it has no size, once it has been set.

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Integer

16

16

TreatZeroAsOne

State

Integer

16

16

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Select Input Bit 0 - 10016

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_0

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 1 - 10017

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_1

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 2 - 10018

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_2

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 3 - 10019

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_3

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 4 - 10066

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_4

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 5 - 10067

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_5

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 6 - 10068

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_6

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 7 - 10069

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_7

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 8 - 10070

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_8

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Input Bit 9 - 10071

Name in SoftPLC: SEL_INPUT_BIT_9

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Loosening - 10029

Selects loosening as default operation mode and used in combination with Start Tools -10028 signal.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_LOOSENING

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Relevant Information
  • Start Tools - 10028

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Next Identifier Number - 10116

It is possible to use the signal Select Next Identifier Number when a task in the virtual station is configured as:

  • Batch Sequence

  • Source Tightening

  • Source Batch

    • Number Identifier method

    • String Identifier method

ST Selector configurable functions Take Next and Take Previous enable the input signals Select Next Identifier Number and Select Previous Identifier Number.

Batch Sequence selected as Virtual Station Task

If Free Order switch has been enabled, the signal Select Next Identifier Number can select different batches within the selected sequence.

Before selecting batches, it is mandatory that they have the identifier number assigned. If a batch does not have the identifier number assigned, the signal Select Next Identifier Number cannot select it, even if Free Order switch is enabled.

It enables looping through the batches that have a configured identifier number.
If identifier number is "None", it is possible to select it only after all Batches with configured identifier number are completed.

It is possible to do looping, but 0 is skipped. When a batch is finished, it is no longer selectable.

For example, in case of batches with assigned identifier numbers 1,2,4,5, the signal runs in loop: 1,2,4,5,1,2,4... as long as the batches are not finished.

Source Tightening selected as Virtual Station Task

The signal selects the next identifier number from the list of tightening programs specified in the Source Tightening task.
The selection runs from the currently selected identifier number to the next larger one.

When the biggest identifier number is selected, this signal selects 0; after 0, the signal selects the next bigger identifier number.

If 0 is selected as identifier number, the tool is locked.

If the identifier number has been added to the Source Tightening list, but no tightening program has ever been assigned to it, it is skipped while looping through the Source Tightening list.

If the tightening program is assigned to an identifier number and then it is removed from the list of tightening programs, it is still possible to select this identifier number. In this case, the tool is locked because there is not a specific tightening program.

When Selector Mode switch is set to Confirm, the socket selector needs to be assigned and configured. All tightening programs can be selected, but before running them, appropriate socket must be lifted from the socket selector.

Source Batch selected as Virtual Station Task

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to Number, the signal Select Next Identifier Number selects sequences from a list of sequences shown in Source Batch task.

It is possible to do looping through 0. The signal Select Next Identifier Number selects only the identifier numbers assigned to sequences.

For example, if there are 4 sequences available with identifier numbers 1,2,4, and 8, the signal Select Next Identifier Number iterates and selects 1,2,4,8,0,1,2...

The identifier numbers not defined are not selected.

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to String, it is necessary to select the sequence through external sources (like scanner or Open Protocol). The signal Select Next Identifier Number is able to select the batches within the selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_NEXT_ID_NUMBER

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Select Previous Identifier Number - 10117

It is possible to use the signal Select Previous Identifier Number when a task in the virtual station is configured as:

  • Batch Sequence

  • Source Tightening

  • Source Batch

    • Number Identifier method

    • String Identifier method

ST Selector configurable functions Take Next and Take Previous enable the input signals Select Next Identifier Number and Select Previous Identifier Number.

Batch Sequence selected as Virtual Station Task

If Free Order switch has been enabled, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number can select different batches within the selected sequence.

Before selecting batches, it is mandatory that they have the identifier number assigned. If a batch does not have the identifier number assigned, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number cannot select it, even if Free Order switch is enabled.

It enables looping through the batches that have a configured identifier number.
If identifier number is "None", it is possible to select it only after all Batches with configured identifier number are completed.

It is possible to do looping, but 0 is skipped. When a batch is finished, it is no longer selectable.

For example, in case of batches with assigned identifier numbers 1,2,4,5, the signal runs in loop: 5,4,2,1,5,4,2... as long as the batches are not finished.

Source Tightening selected as Virtual Station Task

The signal selects the previous identifier number from the list of tightening programs specified in the Source Tightening task.
The selection runs from the currently selected identifier number to the previous lower one.

When the smallest identifier number is selected, this signal selects 0; after 0, the signal selects the next smaller identifier number.

If 0 is selected as identifier number, the tool is locked.

If the tightening program is assigned to an identifier number and then it is removed from the list of tightening programs, it is still possible to select this identifier number. In this case, the tool is locked because there is not a specific tightening program.

When Selector Mode switch is set to Confirm, the socket selector needs to be assigned and configured. All tightening programs can be selected, but before running them, appropriate socket must be lifted from the socket selector.

Source Batch selected as Virtual Station Task

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to Number, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number selects sequences from a list of sequences shown in Source Batch task.

It is possible to do looping through 0. The signal Select Previous Identifier Number selects only the identifier numbers assigned to sequences.

For example, if there are 4 sequences available with identifier numbers 1,2,4, and 8, the signal Select Previous Identifier Number iterates and selects 8,4,2,1,0,8,4...

The identifier numbers not defined are not selected.

In Sources > Batch Sequence > Source Batch, when the identifier method is set to String, it is necessary to select the sequence through external sources (like scanner or Open Protocol). The signal Select Previous Identifier Number is able to select the batches within the selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECT_PREVIOUS_ID_NUMBER

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Set Bistable Relay - 10021

Set the bistable relay output.

Name in SoftPLC: SET_BISTABLE_RELAY

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Socket Selector External Green Light - 10046

Controls green lights when socket selector is in external mode (how multiple physical devices are mapped to logical sockets are defined by the socket selector resource configuration).

  • Byte0 - logical sockets 1-4

  • Byte1 - logical sockets 5-8

  • Byte2 - logical sockets 9-12

  • Byte3 - logical sockets 13-16

  • Byte4 - logical sockets 17-20

  • Byte5 - logical sockets 21-24

  • Byte6 - logical sockets 25-28

  • Byte7 - logical sockets 29-32

2 bits per socket, 00=off, 01=flash, 10=solid

Name in SoftPLC: SOCKET_SEL_EXT_GREEN_LIGHT

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

uint64

1

64

SocketLedControlTwoDevices

State

uint64

1

64

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Socket Selector External Red Light - 10047

Controls red lights when socket selector is in external mode (how multiple physical devices are mapped to logical sockets are defined by the socket selector resource configuration).

  • Byte0 - logical sockets 1-4

  • Byte1 - logical sockets 5-8

  • Byte2 - logical sockets 9-12

  • Byte3 - logical sockets 13-16

  • Byte4 - logical sockets 17-20

  • Byte5 - logical sockets 21-24

  • Byte6 - logical sockets 25-28

  • Byte7 - logical sockets 29-32

2 bits per socket, 00=off, 01=flash, 10=solid

Name in SoftPLC: SOCKET_SEL_EXT_RED_LIGHT

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

uint64

1

64

SocketLedControlTwoDevices

State

uint64

1

64

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Start Loosening - 10011

Active signal starts loosening. Once digital input goes inactive the loosening must be stopped.

Name in SoftPLC: START_LOOSENING

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Tightening - 10010

Active signal starts tightening. Once input goes inactive the tightening must be stopped.

Name in SoftPLC: START_TIGHTENING

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Tightening Pulse - 10024

The tightening starts at signal. Runs until the tightening is finished, or until the 30 sec timeout in tightening program occurs.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_START_PULSE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Start Tools - 10028

Active signal which starts the tool (default operation mode is tightening). As soon as signal goes inactive the tool must be stopped. Used in combination with Select Loosening - 10029 signal.

Name in SoftPLC: START_DRIVE_CONTINIOUS

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Relevant Information
  • Select Loosening - 10029

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Unlock Tool on Complete - 10051

Unlocks a tool that is locked by "Tool Lock on Complete".

Name in SoftPLC: UNLOCK_TOOL_ON_COMPLETE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Unlock Tool on Disable - 10059

Name in SoftPLC: UNLOCK_TOOL_ON_DISABLE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Output Signals

Converter
Signal Type
Value Type
Size Min [bit]
Size Max [bit]
Devices

Active Identifier String - 186

Set when an identifier string has been received and accepted by the work-task; it is necessary that even sequence or tightening program are running.
If running Source batch-string, it is set when all scans have been received and a sequence had been selected. In that case it includes concatenated string consisted of saved positions.
For other work-tasks it includes the “VIN” number.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_IDENTIFIER_STRING

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Active Identifier String 1 - 188

Signal corresponding to the first configured string in Source batch-string.
Active Identifier String 1 signal is sent once a scanning sequence is done and a sequence has been selected, thus the identifier parts are active.
The strings is filtered with saved position.
Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_ID_STRING_1

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Active Identifier String 2 - 189

Signal corresponding to the second configured string in Source batch-string.
Active Identifier String 2 signal is sent once a scanning sequence is done and a sequence has been selected, thus the identifier parts are active.
The strings is filtered with saved position.
Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_ID_STRING_2

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Active Identifier String 3 - 190

Signal corresponding to the third configured string in Source batch-string.
Active Identifier String 3 signal is sent once a scanning sequence is done and a sequence has been selected, thus the identifier parts are active.
The strings is filtered with saved position.
Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_ID_STRING_3

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Active Identifier String 4 - 191

Signal corresponding to the fourth configured string in Source batch-string.
Active Identifier String 4 signal is sent once a scanning sequence is done and a sequence has been selected, thus the identifier parts are active.
The strings is filtered with saved position.
Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: ACTIVE_ID_STRING_4

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Batch Completed - 30

The batch counter is equal to the batch size number. Result can be OK or NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COMPLETED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Completed NOK - 37

Batch finished with status NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COMPLETED_NOK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Completed OK - 36

Batch finished with status OK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COMPLETED_OK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Count - 31

Current number in the batch. Can only be viewed on a display.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_COUNT

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Batch Running - 32

Indicates that a batch in a batch sequence is running.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_RUNNING

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Sequence Completed NOK - 46

Batch sequence finished with status NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_SEQUENCE_NOK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Sequence Completed OK - 45

Batch sequence finished with status OK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_SEQUENCE_OK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Sequence Done - 48

Indicates when a sequence is completed, both in case Batch Sequence Completed OK and Batch Sequence Completed NOK.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCH_SEQUENCE_COMPLETED

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

Event

Boolean

1

1

Invert

Event

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Batch Sequence Running - 47

Indicates if the Batch Sequence is running or not.

Name in SoftPLC: BATCHSEQUENCE_RUNNING

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Bistable Relay - 40

Bistable Relay is a signal controlled by the inputs "Set Bistable Relay" and "Reset Bistable Relay".
After receiving the input "Set Bistable Relay", Bistable Relay signal is set to True.
After receiving the input "Reset Bistable Relay", Bistable Relay signal is set to False.

If "Set Bistable Relay" or "Reset Bistable Relay" goes low, the Bistable relay keeps its state.
The state for the Bistable relay changes when "Set Bistable Relay" or "Reset Bistable Relay" goes high.

After restarting the controller, the Bistable relay is set to False as default.

Name in SoftPLC: BISTABLE_RELAY

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Calibration Alarm - 138

The Calibration alarm from the Tool maintenance configuration. Provides a reminder for when it is time to calibrate the tool.

Name in SoftPLC: CALIBRATION_ALARM

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Configuration Version - 88

Name in SoftPLC: CONFIGURATION_VERSION

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

32

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Controller Switched On - 42

Set to true at start up of IO Exchange

Name in SoftPLC: IO_ON

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Current Running Batch - 180

Shows the index of the current running batch in a sequence. If socket selector is used it will show zero if none, more than one or wrong socket is selected. For source tightening it will show 1 if batch mode is used and a batch is running.

Name in SoftPLC: CURRENT_RUNNING_BATCH_IX

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Direction Switch CCW - 13

The direction switch on the tool is turned in counter clockwise direction.

Name in SoftPLC: DIRECTION_SWITCH_CCW

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Direction Switch CW - 12

The direction switch on the tool is turned in clockwise direction.

Name in SoftPLC: DIRECTION_SWITCH_CW

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Event Code - 30001

Relay an event when it is triggered. Momentary, on for two cycle times.

Name in SoftPLC: EVENT_CODE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Event Code Severity - 30003

Event Code Severity is an output signal which is activated when the triggered event has severity of error or warning.

Name in SoftPLC: EVENT_CODE_SEVERITY

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Event Present - 161

Indicates if event is triggered. It is only triggered on accessories if event requires an ACK.

Name in SoftPLC: EVENT_PRESENT

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus Disconnected - 96

Name in SoftPLC: FIELDBUS_DISCONNECTED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Final Angle - 31003

Actual measured Angle value at the end of the tightening cycle.

Name in SoftPLC: FINAL_ANGLE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

16

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Final Angle - 8

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Float

0

0

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Final Angle Status - 31006

This signal shows the status of the final angle, which can be:

  • OK - if the measured angle is within the limits configured in the tightening program.

  • HIGH - if the measured angle is more than the high limit configured in the tightening program.

  • LOW - if the measured angle is less than the low limit configured in the tightening program.

The value of the Final Angle Status signal shows differently, depending on the configuration of the fieldbus signal.
If the user selects the signal converter, the signal shows one of the following values:

  • O - Final Angle Status OK.

  • H - Final Angle Status High.

  • L - Final Angle Status Low.

If there is no filter applied, the signal shows one of the following values:

  • 1 - Final Angle Status OK.

  • 2 - Final Angle Status High.

  • 3 - Final Angle Status Low.

Name in SoftPLC: FINAL_ANGLE_STATUS

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Integer

2

8

StatusAsChar

State

Integer

2

8

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Final Measured Current - 31017

Current at the measurement step of final angle and final torque. It is sent when a result is available.

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

Event

Integer

32

32

FixedPointToDecimal

Event

Integer

32

32

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Final Target Speed - 31020

The target speed of the last step of the tightening program.

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Integer

16

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Final Target Torque - 31015

Gets the target torque of the tightening program for a performed tightening. The value is copied from the program of the tightening result and is published after the tightening.

The Multistep programs retrieve the Target Torque from the last tightening step in the tightening program defined as Step Category "Final".

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

Event

Integer

32

32

FixedPointToDecimal

Event

Integer

32

32

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Final Torque - 31002

Actual measured torque value at the end of the tightening cycle.

Name in SoftPLC: FINAL_TORQUE

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Integer

32

32

FixedPointToDecimal

State

Integer

32

32

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Final Torque - 5

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Float

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Final Torque Status - 31009

This signal shows the status of the final torque, which can be:

  • OK - if the measured torque is within the limits configured in the tightening program.

  • HIGH - if the measured torque is more than the high limit configured in the tightening program.

  • LOW - if the measured torque is less than the low limit configured in the tightening program.

The value of the Final Torque Status signal shows differently, depending on the configuration of the fieldbus signal.
If the user selects the signal converter, the signal shows one of the following values:

  • O - Final Torque Status OK.

  • H - Final Torque Status High.

  • L - Final Torque Status Low.

If there is no filter applied, the signal shows one of the following values:

  • 1 - Final Torque Status OK.

  • 2 - Final Torque Status High.

  • 3 - Final Torque Status Low.

Name in SoftPLC: FINAL_TORQUE_STATUS

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Integer

2

8

StatusAsChar

State

Integer

2

8

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

First Target Torque - 31019

Retrieves the first target torque after a completed tightening.

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

Event

Integer

32

32

FixedPointToDecimal

Event

Integer

32

32

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

High Angle - 10

Angle result is too high.

Name in SoftPLC: HIGH_ANGLE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

High Torque - 7

Torque result is higher than maximum torque limit.

Name in SoftPLC: HIGH_TORQUE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Identifier Received - 100

Name in SoftPLC: IDENTIFIER_RECEIVED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Last Received Identifier String - 187

Set directly when an identifier has been received in the work-task.
For Source batch-string, it is set at every scanning in scan process, thus it is changed for every scanning and sent even if it does not match in length.
String set is in raw format and not only "saved positions" in the string.
For other work-tasks this signal is equal to Active Identifier String signal.

Name in SoftPLC: LAST_RECEIVED_ID_STRING

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Relevant Information
  • Active Identifier String - 186

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

License Server Connection Lost - 134

Indicates that the connection to the Atlas Copco license server has been lost or the synchronization has failed. The signal is cleared when the License manager synchronization has been done successfully

Name in SoftPLC: LICENSE_SERVER_CONN_LOST

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Loosening Disabled - 184

Loosening Disabled is an output signal which is activated when the loosening is externally locked by any of the following signals:

  • 20003 - Lock Loosening

  • 20004 - Lock Tool Active High

  • 20033 - Line Control Lock

  • 20018 - Open Protocol Lock

  • 20021 - Fieldbus Lock Loosening

  • 20041 - Soft PLC Lock Loosening

  • 20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_DISABLED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Loosening Enabled - 185

Loosening Disabled is an output signal which is activated when the loosening is not externally locked by any of the following signals:

  • 20003 - Lock Loosening

  • 20004 - Lock Tool Active High

  • 20033 - Line Control Lock

  • 20018 - Open Protocol Lock

  • 20021 - Fieldbus Lock Loosening

  • 20041 - Soft PLC Lock Loosening

  • 20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_ENABLED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Loosening is Locked - 28

The loosening is disabled.

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_IS_LOCKED

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Loosening NOK - 74

NOK loosening took place.

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_NOK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Loosening OK - 70

OK loosening took place.

Name in SoftPLC: LOOSENING_OK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Low Angle - 9

Angle result is lower than minimum angle limit.

Name in SoftPLC: LOW_ANGLE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Low Torque - 6

Torque result is lower than minimum torque limit.

Name in SoftPLC: LOW_TORQUE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Manual Mode - 101

Indicates on any supported and configured accessory the Virtual Station status for manual mode

Name in SoftPLC: MANUAL_MODE

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Max Consecutive NOK Reached - 35

Indicates Max coherent NOK tightening counter is reachead.

Name in SoftPLC: MAX_COHERENT_NOK_REACHED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Open End in Open Position - 89

Open End tool in open position.

Name in SoftPLC: OPEN_END_IN_OPEN_POSITION

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Open Protocol Disconnected - 95

If Open Protocol is set to off in the Virtual Station, "Open Protocol Disconnected" signal is set to False.
If Open Protocol is turned on in the Virtual Station the "Open Protocol Disconnected" signal is set to True.
When at least one client (several Open Protocol clients can connect to the same Virtual Station) is connected the "Open Protocol Disconnected" signal is set to False.

Name in SoftPLC: OPEN_PROTOCOL_DISCONNECTED

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Pass-Through Identifier - 104

Output signal for sending a scanned string from a scanner to an external device.

Name in SoftPLC: BARCODE_ID_PASSTHROUGH

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

String

8

800

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Program End - 168

This signal indicates the torque level when the tightening cycle is complete. A timer - Program end timeout - starts when the torque falls below this level. Tightening is complete when the torque has fallen below the level for Program end torque and stayed there until Program end timeout has been reached.

Name in SoftPLC: PROGRAM_END

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Program Start - 132

Defines the starting level for a tightening cycle.

Name in SoftPLC: PROGRAM_START

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

PVT Compensate Value - 31029

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

Event

Integer

32

32

FixedPointToDecimal

Event

Integer

32

32

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Read Result Queue Flushed - 30006

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Ready to Start - 29

If a tool is connected to the virtual station, there is not any active tightening locks, emergency stop is not activated, and a valid Tightening Program is selected, this signal indicates that it is possible to start a tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: READY_TO_START

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Received Identifier 1 - 192

Signal corresponding to the first configured string in Source batch-string.
Active Identifier String 1 signal is sent in the order the strings/identifiers are received by the system as soon as a string has been received. If running in forced order scan, it is in the configured order, but if running free order scan, 1 might not correspond to the first configured string, but to the first received string.
The strings is the raw received string and not have the "saved position" applied.
Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: RECEIVED_IDENTIFIER_1

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Received Identifier 2 - 193

Signal corresponding to the second configured string in Source batch-string.
Active Identifier String 2 signal is sent in the order the strings/identifiers are received by the system as soon as a string has been received. If running in forced order scan, it is in the configured order, but if running free order scan, 2 might not correspond to the second configured string, but to the second received string.
The strings is the raw received string and not have the "saved position" applied.
Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: RECEIVED_IDENTIFIER_2

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Received Identifier 3 - 194

Signal corresponding to the third configured string in Source batch-string.
Active Identifier String 3 signal is sent in the order the strings/identifiers are received by the system as soon as a string has been received. If running in forced order scan, it is in the configured order, but if running free order scan, 3 might not correspond to the third configured string, but to the third received string.
The strings is the raw received string and not have the "saved position" applied.
Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: RECEIVED_IDENTIFIER_3

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Received Identifier 4 - 195

Signal corresponding to the fourth configured string in Source batch-string.
Active Identifier String 4 signal is sent in the order the strings/identifiers are received by the system as soon as a string has been received. If running in forced order scan, it is in the configured order, but if running free order scan, 4 might not correspond to the fourth configured string, but to the fourth received string.
The strings is the raw received string and not have the "saved position" applied.
Only sent when running Source batch string.

Name in SoftPLC: RECEIVED_IDENTIFIER_4

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Rehit - 31014

Name in SoftPLC: FIELDBUS_TIGHTENING_REHIT

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Remaining Batch - 33

Remaining tightenings in a batch. Can only be viewed on a display.

Name in SoftPLC: REMAINING_BATCH

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Rundown Angle - 31038

Value of the rundown angle.

Name in SoftPLC: RUNDOWN_ANGLE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Integer

16

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Rundown Angle High - 165

This signal is active if the rundown angle on the program level is higher than the set one.

Name in SoftPLC: RUNDOWN_ANGLE_HIGH

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Rundown Angle Low - 166

This signal is active if the rundown angle on the program level is lower than the set one.

Name in SoftPLC: RUNDOWN_ANGLE_LOW

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 0 - 139

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_0

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 1 - 140

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_1

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 2 - 141

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_2

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 3 - 142

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_3

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 4 - 143

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_4

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 5 - 144

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_5

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 6 - 145

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_6

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 7 - 146

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_7

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 8 - 147

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_8

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Bit 9 - 163

Bit pattern showing selected sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_SEQUENCE_BIT_9

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Sequence Id - 84

Shows the index of the selected batch sequence.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_BATCH_SEQUENCE_ID

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Integer

1

16

TreatZeroAsOne

State

Integer

1

16

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Selected Tightening Program - 69

The actual id of a selected tightening program; 0 if no tightening program selected.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PSET_ID

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Integer

1

16

TreatZeroAsOne

State

Integer

1

16

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 0 - 148

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_0

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 1 - 149

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_1

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 2 - 150

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_2

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 3 - 151

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_3

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 4 - 152

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_4

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 5 - 153

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_5

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 6 - 154

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_6

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 7 - 155

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_7

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 8 - 156

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_8

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Selected Tightening Program Bit 9 - 157

Bit pattern showing selected tightening program.

Name in SoftPLC: SELECTED_PROGRAM_BIT_9

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Sequence Aborted - 160

Output signal indicating if sequence was aborted.

Name in SoftPLC: SEQUENCE_ABORTED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Service Indicator Alarm - 137

Service alarm configured in the Tool maintenance, provides a mechanism to remind the users when it is time to service the tool.

Name in SoftPLC: SERVICE_INDICATOR_ALARM

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Size of Sequence - 181

Shows the size of the currently running sequence. Only set when a sequence is loaded and not reset when sequence is done.

Name in SoftPLC: SIZE_OF_RUNNING_SEQUENCE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Socket Selector Disconnected Lock - 20039

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Software Major Version - 86

Name in SoftPLC: SOFTWARE_MAJOR_VERSION

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

32

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Software Minor Version - 87

Name in SoftPLC: SOFTWARE_MINOR_VERSION

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

32

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Software Release Version - 85

Version of the software running.

Name in SoftPLC: SOFTWARE_RELEASE_VERSION

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

32

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Start Final Angle - 31016

The Start Final Angle torque value is shown if available. It is sent when a result is available.

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Integer

32

32

FixedPointToDecimal

State

Integer

32

32

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Station Ready - 71

Indicates when the Virtual Station is ready.

Name in SoftPLC: STATION_READY

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Target Torque - 30100

Signal displaying the target torque of a performed tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: STSELECTOR_TARGET_TORQUE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Integer

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Target/Final Torque - 30101

Signal displaying the target/final torque alternatively.

Target/Final torque is between the target torque and the final torque if a selected tightening program is updated or a new tightening program is selected.

Name in SoftPLC: STSELECTOR_TARGET_FINAL_TORQUE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Integer

1

1

Devices

  • Filedbus: FALSE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Filedbus

Filedbus: FALSE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Thread Direction CCW - 26

Selected tightening program has counterclockwise chosen as thread direction.

Name in SoftPLC: THREAD_DIRECTION_CCW

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening Date - 31030

Tightening date in the format YYYY:MM:DD.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_DATE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

String

80

80

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Date Day - 31032

Day of month when the tightening was performed.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_DATE_DAY

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Integer

8

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Date Month - 31033

Month when the tightening was performed.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_DATE_MONTH

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Integer

8

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Date Year - 31034

Year when the tightening was performed.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_DATE_YEAR

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Integer

16

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Disabled - 182

Tightening Disabled is an output signal which is activated when the tightening is externally disabled by any of the following signals:

  • 20002 - Lock Tightening

  • 20004 - Lock Tool Active High

  • 20033 - Line Control Lock

  • 20018 - Open Protocol Lock

  • 20020 - Fieldbus Lock Tightening

  • 20040 - Soft PLC Lock Tightening

  • 20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_DISABLED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening Done - 31010

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_DONE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Enabled - 183

Tightening Enabled is an output signal which is activated when the tightening is not externally disabled by any of the following signals:

  • 20002 - Lock Tightening

  • 20004 - Lock Tool Active High

  • 20033 - Line Control Lock

  • 20018 - Open Protocol Lock

  • 20020 - Fieldbus Lock Tightening

  • 20040 - Soft PLC Lock Tightening

  • 20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_ENABLED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening is Locked - 27

The tightening is disabled; it is not possible to make any tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_IS_LOCKED

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening NOK - 4

At least one result of the tightening is outside the specified limits.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_NOK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening OK - 3

The result of the tightening is within the specified limits.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_OK

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening Program Max Angle - 31004

Name in SoftPLC: MAX_ANGLE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

16

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Program Max Torque - 31007

Name in SoftPLC: MAX_TORQUE

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Integer

32

32

FixedPointToDecimal

State

Integer

32

32

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Program Min Angle - 31005

Name in SoftPLC: MIN_ANGLE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

16

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Program Min Torque - 31008

Name in SoftPLC: MIN_TORQUE

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Integer

32

32

FixedPointToDecimal

State

Integer

32

32

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Time - 31031

Tightening time in the format hh:mm:ss.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_TIME

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

String

64

64

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Time High - 135

Indicates if NOK tightenings occurred due to execution time exceeding the maximum allowed.

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening Time Hour - 31035

Hour when the tightening was performed.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_TIME_HOUR

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Integer

8

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Time Low - 136

Indicates if NOK tightenings occurred due to execution time lowering the minimum allowed.

Tightening Time Low signal works only for Tightening Programs.

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tightening Time Minute - 31037

Minute when the tightening was performed.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_TIME_MINUTES

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Integer

8

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tightening Time Second - 31036

Second when the tightening was performed.

Name in SoftPLC: TIGHTENING_TIME_SEC

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Integer

8

16

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tool Battery Low - 90

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_BATTERY_LOW

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Connected - 73

Indicates if a tool is connected or not to a Virtual Station.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_CONNECTED

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Disabled - 158

Tool Disabled is an output signal which is activated when the tool is externally disabled by any of the following signals:

  • 20002 - Lock Tightening

  • 20003 - Lock Loosening

  • 20004 - Lock Tool Active High

  • 20033 - Line Control Lock

  • 20018 - Open Protocol Lock

  • 20020 - Fieldbus Lock Tightening

  • 20021 - Fieldbus Lock Loosening

  • 20040 - Soft PLC Lock Tightening

  • 20041 - Soft PLC Lock Loosening

  • 20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_DISABLED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Enabled - 159

Tool Enabled is an output signal which is activated when the tool is not externally disabled by any of the following signals:

  • 20002 - Lock Tightening

  • 20003 - Lock Loosening

  • 20004 - Lock Tool Active High

  • 20033 - Line Control Lock

  • 20018 - Open Protocol Lock

  • 20020 - Fieldbus Lock Tightening

  • 20021 - Fieldbus Lock Loosening

  • 20040 - Soft PLC Lock Tightening

  • 20041 - Soft PLC Lock Loosening

  • 20061 - Lock Tool Active Low

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_ENABLED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Function Button Pressed - 179

Output signal tracking the Function button state. The signal is set when the Function button is pressed and cleared when the Function button is released. Not for critical use in case of battery tools.

Name in SoftPLC: FUNCTION_BUTTON_PRESSED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Health OK - 103

Tool Health OK is High when there is no tool error present, while Tool Health OK is Low when any of the following tool errors are set:

  • Tool Overheated

  • Tool Requires motor tuning

  • Open End not tuned

  • Tool parameter file not supported

  • Tool battery empty

  • Tool trigger supervision failure

  • Tool cable not supported

  • Tool memory failure

  • Tool memory corrupt

  • Tool service interval expired

  • Tool software version mismatch

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool LED Mirror Green - 98

Signal showing the tool green LED status on an accessory.

The Tool LED Mirror Green signal is set to True, if the tool green LED is ON/flashing.
The Tool LED Mirror Green signal is set to False, if the tool green LED is OFF.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_RESULT_LED_GREEN

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool LED Mirror Red - 97

Signal showing the tool red LED status on an accessory.

The Tool LED Mirror Red signal is set to True, if the tool red LED is ON/flashing.
The Tool LED Mirror Red signal is set to False, if the tool red LED is OFF.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_RESULT_LED_RED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool LED Mirror Yellow - 99

Signal showing the tool yellow LED status on an accessory.

The Tool LED Mirror Yellow signal is set to True, if the tool yellow LED is ON/flashing.
The Tool LED Mirror Yellow signal is set to False, if the tool yellow LED is OFF.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_RESULT_LED_YELLOW

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Loosening - 22

Indicates that the tool is loosening.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_LOOSENING

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Rotation CCW - 25

Tool rotation direction is counterclockwise for left-handed threaded screws.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_ROTATION_CCW

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Rotation CW - 24

Tool rotation direction is clockwise for right-handed threaded screws.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_ROTATION_CW

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Running - 23

Indicates that the tool is rotating (clockwise [CW] or counter-clockwise [CCW]).

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_RUNNING

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool Serial Number Numeric - 31021

Integer part of the serial number.

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

32

32

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tool Tag Identifier - 94

Name in SoftPLC: TOOLTAG_IDENTIFIER

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

String

8

800

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tool Tightening - 21

Indicates that the tool is tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_TIGHTENING

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

ToolsNet Connection Lost - 133

Indicates if enabled connection between ToolsNet and controller got interrupted or is working as expected.

Name in SoftPLC: TOOLSNET_CONNECTION_LOST

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Total Number of Tightenings - 31018

Total number of the tightenings performed by the tool over its entire lifetime.

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Integer

8

32

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Trigger pressed - 11

Indicates that the tool trigger has been pressed.

Name in SoftPLC: TRIGGER_PRESSED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Virtual Station Name - 105

Provides the virtual station name.

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

String

8

800

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Input/Output Signals

Converter
Signal Type
Value Type
Size Min [bit]
Size Max [bit]
Devices

Clear Results - 39

Clears status of other signals set to next tightening.

Name in SoftPLC: CLEAR_RESULTS

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Disable Open Protocol Commands - 10060

Disables the possibility to send commands over Open Protocol to the Virtual Station.

Name in SoftPLC: DISABLE_OPEN_PRTCOL_CMDS

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

External Identifier - 10045

The string sent in External identifier is included in the result as VIN number. It is possible to provide up to 2 identifiers to be passed from Fieldbus for task selection.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_IDENTIFIER

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32Hnw

State

String

8

800

IdentifierU32

State

String

8

800

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

External Monitored 1 - 10035

External Monitored 1 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_1

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

External Monitored 2 - 10036

External Monitored 2 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_2

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

External Monitored 3 - 10037

External Monitored 3 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_3

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

External Monitored 4 - 10038

External Monitored 4 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_4

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

External Monitored 5 - 10039

External Monitored 5 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_5

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

External Monitored 6 - 10040

External Monitored 6 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_6

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

External Monitored 7 - 10041

External Monitored 7 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_7

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

External Monitored 8 - 10042

External Monitored 8 is an Input/Output signal that is not attached to any specific feature in the controller and can be used for customer specific needs.

Name in SoftPLC: EXTERNAL_MONITORED_8

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

Boolean

1

1

Invert

State

Boolean

1

1

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus Keep Alive - 30002

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Flash Tool Green LED (external protocol) - 10058

Name in SoftPLC: FLASH_TOOL_GREEN_LED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 1 - 50

Input/Output 1 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_1

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 10 - 59

Input/Output 10 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_10

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 2 - 51

Input/Output 2 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_2

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 3 - 52

Input/Output 3 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_3

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 4 - 53

Input/Output 4 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_4

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 5 - 54

Input/Output 5 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_5

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 6 - 55

Input/Output 6 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_6

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 7 - 56

Input/Output 7 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_7

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 8 - 57

Input/Output 8 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_8

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic I/O 9 - 58

Input/Output 9 used for Open Protocol.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_IO_9

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

8

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: TRUE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: TRUE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 1 - 169

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_1

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 10 - 178

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_10

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 2 - 170

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_2

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 3 - 171

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_3

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 4 - 172

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_4

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 5 - 173

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_5

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 6 - 174

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_6

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 7 - 175

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_7

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 8 - 176

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_8

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Generic Rising Edge 9 - 177

Generic Input/Output signal.

Name in SoftPLC: GENERIC_RISING_EDGE_9

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Event

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Socket Lifted - 10014

Is generated when a unique socket is lifted on socket selector (integer = socket ID), no socket is lifted (integer = 0) or when more than one is lifted (integer = 0).

Name in SoftPLC: SOCKET_LIFTED

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Integer

1

32

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Socket Lifted Raw - 10043

Added to support backwards compatibility with PF4000 in certain protocols for socket lifted notifications (as opposed to Socket Lifted 10013). Integer is bit pattern for all lifted sockets (regardless of flashing or how many is lifted).

Name in SoftPLC: SOCKET_LIFTED_RAW

Converter

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

Standard

State

uint64

1

32

SocketSelectorTwoDevices

State

uint64

1

32

To avoid duplicating signals, it is possible to define Value Converters.

Converters are used to support more than one representation of the same signal (for example Angle/Torque Status can both be represented bitwise or as a status character).

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

Tool in Production Space - 93

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_IN_PRODUCT_SPACE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

Tool in Work Space - 92

Name in SoftPLC: TOOL_IN_WORK_SPACE

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

Boolean

1

1

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: TRUE

  • Internal I/O: TRUE

  • Operator Panel: TRUE

  • Tool Functions: TRUE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: TRUE

  • TLS Tag: TRUE

  • I/O Expander: TRUE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: TRUE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: TRUE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: TRUE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: TRUE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: TRUE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: TRUE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: TRUE

User ID - 10050

Name in SoftPLC: USER_ID

Signal Type

Value Type

Size Min [bit]

Size Max [bit]

State

String

8

800

Devices

  • Fieldbus: TRUE

  • Indicator Box: FALSE

  • Internal I/O: FALSE

  • Operator Panel: FALSE

  • Tool Functions: FALSE

  • ST Selector: FALSE

  • Stacklight: FALSE

  • TLS Tag: FALSE

  • I/O Expander: FALSE

Fieldbus

Fieldbus: TRUE

Indicator Box

Indicator Box: FALSE

Internal I/O

Internal I/O: FALSE

Operator Panel

Operator Panel: FALSE

Tool Functions

Tool Functions: FALSE

ST Selector

ST Selector: FALSE

Stacklight

Stacklight: FALSE

TLS Tag

TLS Tag: FALSE

I/O Expander

I/O Expander: FALSE

List of Third-Party Licenses

Power Focus controllers incorporate third party components whose licenses require us to publish copies of the licensing language and/or copyright notices. In compliance with those requirements, here are copies of the licenses. Please, click on any of the licenses below to show a copy of the license text.

Software

Version

Licenses

acl

2.2.52

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.1

alsa-lib

1.1.2

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.1

alsa-state

0.2.0

  • MIT

alsa-tools

1.1.0

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.0

alsa-utils

1.1.2

  • GPL v2.0

anybus

1.1

  • Proprietary

atftp

0.7.1 + gitAUTOINC + be3291a18c

  • GPL v2.0

attr

2.4.47

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.1

barebox

2018.06.0

  • GPL v2.0

base-files

3.0.14

  • GPL v2.0

base-files-px2-base

1.0

  • MIT

base-passwd

3.5.29

  • GPL v2.0

bash

4.3.30

  • GPL v3.0

bash-completion

2.4

  • GPL v2.0

bluez5

5.41

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.1

boost

1.61.0

  • MIT

  • BSL v1.0

  • Python v2.0

busybox-px2base

1.24.1

  • GPL v2.0

  • bzip v2.0

bzip2

1.0.6

  • bzip v2.0

ca-certificates

20160104

  • GPL v2.0

  • MPL v2.0

cppunit

1.13.1

  • LGPL v2.1

cryptodev-linux

1.8

  • GPL v2.0

curl

7.50.1

  • MIT

db

3.0.35

  • AGPL v3.0

dbus

1.10.10

  • GPL v2.0

  • AFL v2.0

dhcp

4.3.4

  • ISC

dosfstools

4.0

  • GPL v3.0

dt-utils

2017.03.0

  • GPL v2.0

e2fsprogs

1.43

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.0

  • BSD

  • MIT

ecryptfs-tools

1.0

  • GPL v1.0

elfutils

0.166

  • GPL v3.0

  • Elfutils-Exception

eudev

3.2.2

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.1

expat

2.2.0

  • MIT

fbset

2.1

  • GPL v2.0

fb-test

1.1.0

  • GPL v2.0

fcgi

2.4.0

  • OML

finit

3.1

  • MIT

firmware-imx

5.4

  • Proprietary

flac

1.3.1

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.1

  • BSD

  • GFDL v1.2

flatbuffers

1.9.0

  • Apache v2.0

fruit

3.4.0 + gitAUTOINC + ece0f7218c

  • Apache v2.0

fuse

2.9.4

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.0

gcc-runtime

6.2.0

  • GPL v3.0 with GCC exception

gdb

8.0.1

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.0

  • GPL v3.0

  • LGPL v3.0

gdbm

1.12

  • GPL v3.0

glib-2.0

2.48.2

  • LGPL v2.0

  • BSD

  • Public Domain License

glibc

2.24

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.1

gmp

6.1.1

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v3.0

gnutls

3.5.3

  • GPL v3.0

  • LGPL v2.1

grep

2.25

  • GPL v3.0

gstreamer1.0

1.8.3

  • LGPL v2.0

gstreamer1.0-plugins-base

1.8.3

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.0

hostpad

2.6

  • GPL v2.0

  • BSD

htop

1.0.3

  • GPL v2.0

icu

57.1

  • ICU

init-ifupdown

1.0

  • GPL v2.0

initscripts

1.0

  • GPL v2.0

iproute2

4.7.0

  • GPL v2.0

iptables

1.6.0

  • GPL v2.0

ipwatchd

1.2

  • GPL v2.0

iw

4.7

  • BSD

json-spirit

4.08

  • MIT

keyutils

1.5.9

  • GPL v2.0

kmod

23 + gitAUTOINC + 65a885df5f

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.1

kmsfbwrap-px2base

12.0

  • GPL v2.0

libarchive

3.2.2

  • BSD

libbsd

0.8.3

  • BSD v4 Clause

  • ISC

  • Public Domain License

libcap

2.25

  • GPL v2.0

  • BSD

libdrm

2.4.70

  • MIT

libestr

0.1.10

  • LGPL v2.1

libevent

2.0.22

  • BSD

libfastjson

0.99.4

  • MIT

libffi

3.2.1

  • MIT

libgcc

6.2.0

  • GPL v3.0 with GCC exception

  • GPL v3.0

libgcrypt

1.7.3

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.1

  • GPL v3.0

libgpg-error

1.24

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.1

libidn

1.33

  • LGPL v3.0

  • LGPL v2.1

  • GPL v3.0

libite

2.0.2

  • BSD

  • ISC

  • MIT

libjpeg-turbo

1.5.0

  • BSD v3 Clause

liblogging

1.0.5

  • BSD

libnet

1.2-rc3

  • BSD

libnfsidmap

0.25

  • BSD

libnl

3.2.28

  • LGPL v2.1

libogg

1.3.2

  • BSD

libpcap

1.8.1

  • BSD

libpcre

8.39

  • BSD

libpng

1.6.24

  • Libpng

librcf

2.2.0.0

  • GPL v2.0

libsamplerate0

0.1.8

  • GPL v2.0

libsndfile1

1.0.27

  • LGPL v2.1

libtinyxml

2.6.2

  • Zlib

libtirpc

1.0.1

  • BSD

libuev

2.2.0

  • MIT

libusb1

1.0.20

  • LGPL v2.1

libvorbis

1.3.5

  • BSD

libxml2

2.9.4

  • MIT

libxslt

1.1.29

  • MIT

lighttpd

1.4.51

  • BSD

linux-atlas

4.14

  • GPL v2.0

linux-libc-headers

4.14.13

  • GPL v2.0

logrotate

3.9.1

  • GPL v2.0

lua

5.1.5

  • MIT

luabind

git

  • MIT

lzo

2.09

  • GPL v2.0

lzop

1.03

  • GPL v2.0

memlog

2.0

  • MIT

mesa

12.0.1

  • MIT

mg

20161005

  • Public Domain License

minizip

1.2.8

  • Zlib

mmc-utils

0.1

  • GPL v2.0

mtd-utils

1.5.2

  • GPL v2.0

nano

2.2.5

  • GPL v3.0

ncurses

6.0 + 20160625

  • MIT

netbase

5.3

  • GPL v2.0

netcat-openbsd

1.105

  • BSD v3 Clause

nettle

3.2

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v3.0

nfs-utils

2.1.1

  • GPL v2.0

  • BSD

  • MIT

ntp

4.2.8p8

  • NTP

openssh

7.6p1

  • BSD

openssl

1.0.2n

  • openSSL

opkg

0.3.3

  • GPL v2.0

opkg-arch-config

1.0

  • MIT

opkg-utils

0.3.2 + gitAUTOINC + 3ffece9bf1

  • GPL v2.0

orc

0.4.25

  • BSD v3 Clause

  • BSD v2 Clause

os-release

1.0

  • MIT

packagegroup-atlas-qt5

1.0

  • MIT

packagegroup-atlas-sxb

1.0

  • MIT

packagegroup-base

1.0

  • MIT

packagegroup-core-boot

1.0

  • MIT

packagegroup-core-eclipse-debug

1.0

  • MIT

packagegroup-core-nfs

1.0

  • MIT

packagegroup-core-ssh-openssh

1.0

  • MIT

packagegroup-px2it

1.0

  • MIT

parted

3.2

  • GPL v3.0

perl

5.22.1

  • GPL v1.0

  • Artistic v1.0

pm-utils

1.4.1

  • GPL v2.0

poco

1.9.0

  • BSL v1.0

pointercal

0.0

  • MIT

popt

1.16

  • MIT

procps

3.3.12

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.0

protobuf

2.6.1 + gitAUTOINC + bba83652e1

  • BSD v3 Clause

python

2.7.12

  • Python v2.0

qtbase

5.7.1 + gitAUTOINC + a55f36211e

  • BSD

  • GPL v2.0

  • GPL v3.0

  • GFDL v1.3

  • LGPL v3.0

  • The Qt Company Commercial

  • The Qt Company LGPL Exception v1.0

qtdeclarative

5.7.1 + gitAUTOINC + 2a992040e2

  • BSD

  • GPL v2.0

  • GPL v3.0

  • GFDL v1.3

  • LGPL v3.0

  • The Qt Company Commercial

  • The Qt Company LGPL Exception v1.0

qtlocation

5.7.1 + gitAUTOINC + de5be121d8

  • BSD

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.1

  • GFDL v1.3

  • LGPL v3.0

  • The Qt Company LGPL Exception v1.1

qtsensors

5.7.1 + gitAUTOINC + 5a57beaaa5

  • BSD

  • GPL v2.0

  • GPL v3.0

  • GFDL v1.3

  • LGPL v3.0

  • The Qt Company Commercial

  • The Qt Company LGPL Exception v1.0

qtwebkit

5.7.1 + gitAUTOINC + 76e2732f01

  • BSD

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.0

qtwebsockets

5.7.1 + gitAUTOINC + 60cede232a

  • GFDL v1.3

  • LGPL v2.1

  • LGPL v3.0

  • The Qt Company LGPL Exception v1.1

qtxmlpatterns

5.7.1 + gitAUTOINC + 89dbcc4f80

  • BSD

  • GPL v2.0

  • GPL v3.0

  • GFDL v1.3

  • LGPL v3.0

  • The Qt Company Commercial

  • The Qt Company LGPL Exception v1.0

rauc

0.4

  • LGPL v2.1

readline

6.3

  • GPL v3.0

rpcbind

0.2.3

  • BSD

rsync

3.1.2

  • GPL v3.0

rsyslog

8.22.0

  • Apache v2.0

  • GPL v3.0

  • LGPL v3.0

run-postinsts

1.0

  • MIT

shadow

4.2.1

  • BSD

  • Artistic v1.0

shadow-security

4.2.1

  • MIT

sqlite3

3.14.1

  • Public Domain License

squashfs-tools

5.7.1 + gitrAUTOINC + 9c1db6d13a

  • Public Domain License

  • GPL v2.0

st-load

1.0

  • Public Domain License

stm32flash

git

  • GPL v2.0

strace

4.13

  • BSD

sysfsutils

2.1.0

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.1

sysvinit-bootlogd

2.88dsf

  • GPL v2.0

tcf-agent

1.4.0 + gitAUTOINC + 2dddd5f440

  • EDL v1.0

  • EPL v1.0

tcpdump

4.7.4

  • BSD

tcp-wrappers

7.6

  • BSD

tslib

1.1

  • LGPL v2.0

tzdata

2016i

  • BSD

  • BSD v3 Clause

  • Public Domain License

u-boot-atlas

2017.09

  • GPL v2.0

u-boot-fw-utils

2017.09

  • GPL v2.0

unzip

6.0

  • BSD v3 Clause

usbutils

008

  • GPL v2.0

util-linux

2.28.1

  • BSD

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.1

wireless-tools

30.pre9

  • BSD

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.1

  • MPL v1.1

wpa-supplicant

2.5

  • BSD

xerces-c

2.7.0

  • Apache v2.0

xz

5.2.2

  • GPL v2.0

  • LGPL v2.1

  • GPL v3.0 with autoconf exception

  • Public Domain License

yaml-cpp

0.6.2

  • MIT

zip

3.0

  • BSD v3 Clause

zlib

1.2.8

  • Zlib

IxB Software | 3.5

Published: 2021-03-10

© Atlas Copco Industrial Technique AB, 2021 | Legal Notice